US20040125081A1 - Page information display method and device and storage medium storing program for displaying page information - Google Patents

Page information display method and device and storage medium storing program for displaying page information Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20040125081A1
US20040125081A1 US10/734,673 US73467303A US2004125081A1 US 20040125081 A1 US20040125081 A1 US 20040125081A1 US 73467303 A US73467303 A US 73467303A US 2004125081 A1 US2004125081 A1 US 2004125081A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
page
display
information
tag
turning
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US10/734,673
Inventor
Keisuke Hayakawa
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
NEC Corp
Original Assignee
NEC Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by NEC Corp filed Critical NEC Corp
Priority to US10/734,673 priority Critical patent/US20040125081A1/en
Publication of US20040125081A1 publication Critical patent/US20040125081A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0487Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser
    • G06F3/0488Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures
    • G06F3/04883Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures for inputting data by handwriting, e.g. gesture or text
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0481Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] based on specific properties of the displayed interaction object or a metaphor-based environment, e.g. interaction with desktop elements like windows or icons, or assisted by a cursor's changing behaviour or appearance
    • G06F3/0483Interaction with page-structured environments, e.g. book metaphor
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0484Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] for the control of specific functions or operations, e.g. selecting or manipulating an object, an image or a displayed text element, setting a parameter value or selecting a range
    • G06F3/04847Interaction techniques to control parameter settings, e.g. interaction with sliders or dials

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a page information display method and device, and in particular to a page information display method and device for displaying electronic information in a unit of page of predetermined size.
  • the information required for the work, study or life is provided from the origins of information to the reader, using media such as books, or periodical publications, e.g., newspaper or magazines or the like. Also, the administrative or judicial information is provided in publications or documents.
  • the information provided in a format accessible using a computer may include information contents from a wide variety of information sources covering data sheets of products manufactured by the company, the information of new products, documents created by the administration, pieces of legislation in making, the Supreme Court gists, research results of the college laboratory, detailed information of lodgings in a certain region, news, weather forecasts, for example. These may be duplicately provided in other paper media such as newspaper columns, magazines, or catalogues, but simply provided through the Internet or in the computer readable medium. Most of the past information may be often difficult to obtain substantially in paper media.
  • Means for operating the computer may be a graphical user interface (GUI, hereinafter referred to as a desktop metaphor) useful in most cases, which is metaphoric to the working environment of desk in the actual world.
  • GUI graphical user interface
  • the working environment of desk is comically drawn to allow a file structure specific to the computer which is nonobjective and uneasy to understand to correspond with something present in the working environment of desk such as a file or folder.
  • the computer beginners can operate the computer intuitively. For example, to delete a file, the file indicated by an icon which is metaphoric to paper is dragged and dropped into a garbage box.
  • a CRT or a liquid crystal display is becoming higher in resolution year after year. For example, if the resolution of about 150 dpi in A4 size is realized, it is possible to access the whole one face of newspaper in A4 size. That is, if the display has substantially a resolution of facsimile class, the newspaper or magazine is made readable in a size which is smaller than the actual size. In such a high-resolution display, the display of 1200 ⁇ 1600 dots can be made in A4 actual size. Therefore, the physical size becomes too small to be useful for the icon in the conventional operating system, giving an impression of something intricate to the user, possibly resulting in a user interface which is rather uneasy to understand.
  • the present invention adopts a user interface having a metaphor like a book, newspaper or magazine.
  • the electronic information is allowed to access in a unit of page of predetermined size. That is, the electronic information is displayed in a unit of page of predetermined size in an information access area of a display unit. And there is only a single information access area and the page can not be turned physically, unlike books.
  • a user interface which is metaphoric to the operation of turning over pages enables the information access area to be effectively used.
  • This invention has a new feature in the user interface metaphoric to the operation of turning over pages, as will be detailed later.
  • the present invention provides a page information display method for displaying the electronic information using an information access device comprising a storage unit for storing the electronic information having plural pages of information in a unit of page of predetermined size, a display unit for displaying the electronic information stored in the storage unit in the unit of page, and an operation unit for inputting an operation to gain access to the page information, the operation unit being provided in the substantially same area as the display unit, and the method comprises: a page turning operation detecting step of outputting a page turning operation detecting signal when a dragging is made on the operation unit in parallel or anti-parallel to a predefined page turning direction at a current page read from the storage unit that is to be displayed at present; a next display page setting step of setting a preceding page or a succeeding page immediately before or after the current page depending on a direction of the dragging operation to a next display page to be displayed at the next time, when the page turning operation detecting signal is detected in
  • the operation unit which is provided in the substantially same area as the display unit, corresponds to a touch panel or a computer display, for example.
  • a dragging is made in a page turning direction on this operation unit, in other words, a dragging operation to press a mouse button and hold it down while moving the pointer in a page turning direction (or an opposite direction), and release the mouse button is performed
  • a page turning operation detecting signal is output in the page turning operation detecting step.
  • a preceding page or a succeeding page of the current page is set as a next display page, depending on a direction of dragging operation. If the next display page is set, the next display page is displayed in place of the current page on the display unit in the page turning process step.
  • FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating one example of a page information display method according to a first embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating one example of a page information display device in the first embodiment as shown in FIG. 1, wherein FIG. 2A is a diagram showing an overall configuration, and FIG. 2B is a diagram showing a detailed configuration of a display controller;
  • FIG. 3 is an explanatory view illustrating an example of a page turning operation with the configuration as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2;
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a configuration of a page holding operation according to the second embodiment of the invention.
  • FIG. 5 is an explanatory view illustrating an example of displaying the number of holding pages with the configuration as shown in FIG. 4, wherein FIG. 5A is a view illustrating a pressure circle, FIG. 5B is a view illustrating a time circle, FIG. 5C is a view illustrating a pressure/time operation performed in a predetermined region, and FIG. 5D is a view illustrating an example of displaying the pressure circle in accordance with the operation as shown in FIG. 5C;
  • FIG. 6 is an explanatory view illustrating an operation example in the second embodiment as shown in FIG. 4, wherein FIG. 6A is a view illustrating a configuration of a page information display device, FIG. 6B is a view illustrating an example of displaying the pressure circle;
  • FIGS. 7A, 7B and 7 C are explanatory views illustrating one example for displaying a multiloop with the configuration as shown in FIG. 4;
  • FIG. 8 is an explanatory view illustrating an example for displaying a coated circle with the configuration as shown in FIG. 4, wherein FIG. 8A is a view illustrating an example of the coated circle in a solid color, FIG. 8B is a view illustrating an example of the coated circle having transparency, and FIG. 8C is a view illustrating an example of the coated circle having gradation;
  • FIG. 9 is an explanatory view illustrating another example for displaying a coated circle with the configuration as shown in FIG. 4, wherein FIG. 9A is a view illustrating one example of the coated circle having a distortion, FIG. 9B is a view showing the reference causing the distortion, FIG. 9C is a view illustrating an example of distortion in the instance of a medium pressure, and FIG. 9D is a view illustrating an example of distortion in the instance of a large pressure;
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of selecting a display format according to a third embodiment of the invention.
  • FIG. 11 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a page information display device in the third embodiment
  • FIG. 12 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of the display format at the time of turning a page with the configuration as shown in FIG. 10, wherein FIG. 12A is a view illustrating one example of the display format of an overwrite type, and FIG. 12B is a view illustrating one example of the display format of a slide type;
  • FIG. 13 is an explanatory view illustrating another example of the display format at the time of turning a page with the configuration as shown in FIG. 10, wherein FIG. 13A is a view illustrating one example of the display format of a compression type, and FIG. 13B is a view illustrating one example of the display format of a 3D type;
  • FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a configuration of a page information display method according to one embodiment of the invention.
  • FIG. 15 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a page information display device suitable for practicing each step as shown in FIG. 14;
  • FIG. 16 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of an initial state of a tag display in this embodiment
  • FIG. 17 is an explanatory view illustrating a tag display example at the fourth page with the configuration as shown in FIG. 16;
  • FIG. 18 is an explanatory view for defining various technical terms for use in a fourth embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the configuration of a semantic display process in which the tag length is changed continuously in the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 20 is an explanatory view illustrating an example of a semantic display in the configuration as shown in FIG. 19;
  • FIG. 21 is a table showing one example of the page information display data for use in the fourth embodiment, in which FIG. 21A is a table illustrating an example where the minimum reference length is defined by the number of dots, and FIG. 21B is a table illustrating an example where the minimum reference length is defined by the physical length;
  • FIG. 22 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a page data display device in the fourth embodiment
  • FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating one example of a process for determining the tag width and the tag length using the data of data structure as shown in FIG. 21;
  • FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating one example of a process for switching between a normal display and a semantic display
  • FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process for displaying a tag again after turning a page
  • FIG. 26 is an explanatory view illustrating a display example while turning a page with the configuration as shown;
  • FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating one example of a process for expanding the tag during the semantic display
  • FIG. 28 is an explanatory view illustrating a display example with the tags near a pointer expanded in the process for expanding the tag as shown in FIG. 27;
  • FIG. 29 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of a page turning display format using a tag, wherein FIG. 29A is a view illustrating one example the display format of tag integral type, and FIG. 29B is a view illustrating one example of the display format of pages integral type;
  • FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating one example of a tag display control with a holding operation in the fourth embodiment
  • FIG. 31 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of the tag display control as shown in FIG. 30;
  • FIG. 32 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of a tag coloring process under the tag display control as shown in FIG. 30;
  • FIG. 33 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of the tag coloring process in an opposite tag display area to that of FIG. 32;
  • FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating one example of the tag display in a process of turning plural pages collectively
  • FIGS. 35A and 35B are explanatory views illustrating a tag display example in the process of turning plural pages collectively as shown in FIG. 34;
  • FIGS. 36A and 36B are explanatory views for highlighting the tag display in an information access area in the process of turning plural pages collectively as shown in FIG. 34;
  • FIG. 37 is an explanatory view illustrating a tag display example after completing the process of turning plural pages collectively;
  • FIG. 38 is an explanatory view illustrating an example in which a pressure circle is displayed over a tag
  • FIG. 38A is a view illustrating an example of a left page tag
  • FIG. 38B is a view illustrating an example of a right page tag
  • FIG. 38C is a view illustrating an example in which the tag coloring and the tag pressure circle are employed at the same time;
  • FIG. 39 is an explanatory view illustrating an example in which a holding object page is changed depending on an operation direction upon the tag, wherein FIG. 39A is a view illustrating one example of holding a previous page, and FIG. 39B is a view illustrating one example of holding a succeeding page;
  • FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing the configuration of this example.
  • FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the former part of a page information display process in the configuration as shown in FIG. 40;
  • FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the latter part of the page information display process continued from the process of FIG. 41;
  • FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating a process for displaying in enlargement the article information in a first example of this invention
  • FIG. 44 is an explanatory view illustrating a continuous enlargement operation by dragging plural articles
  • FIG. 45 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of an article enlargement display with wire frame, wherein FIG. 45A is a view illustrating a display example at the time of an enlargement process, and FIG. 45B is a view illustrating one example of the enlarged article information;
  • FIG. 46 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of a process of embossing and enlarging the article information, wherein FIG. 46A is a view illustrating a state in which an article is shaded for embossing, FIG. 46B is a view illustrating a state in which a selected article is being enlarged, and FIG. 46C is a view illustrating a state after the enlargement process is completed;
  • FIG. 47 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of a tag display when the article information is enlarged
  • FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating one example of an article information table which lists in correspondence the page information and the article information;
  • FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating a process in a second example of the invention.
  • FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating the relation between a pointer event and a page turning in the process as shown in FIG. 49;
  • FIG. 51 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of a process for selecting one of the page turning and the continuous display of article information in a locus of dragging, wherein FIG. 51A is a view illustrating the locus on the straight line, and FIG. 51B is a view illustrating the locus having a curve;
  • FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a prefetch process in a third example of the invention.
  • FIG. 53 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of turning plural pages collectively
  • FIG. 54 is an explanatory view illustrating an example in which the page information of high resolution is memorized
  • FIG. 55 is an explanatory view illustrating an example in which the page information and the article information are memorized separately;
  • FIG. 56 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a page information processing unit that converts the ML data in a fourth example of the invention.
  • FIG. 57 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of the link structure of an ML page, wherein FIG. 57A is a view illustrating one example of the link structure, and FIG. 57B is a view illustrating an example in which the link structure is transformed into a book structure;
  • FIG. 58 is an explanatory view illustrating another example of the link structure of the ML page.
  • FIG. 59 is an explanatory view illustrating a further example of the link structure of the ML page.
  • FIG. 60 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a page information display device for controlling the tag display at the time of streaming in a fifth example of the invention.
  • FIG. 61 is a view illustrating an example of controlling the tag display in accordance with the amount of downloaded data in the configuration as shown in FIG. 60, wherein FIG. 61A is a view illustrating an example of displaying the tag for the page which has been completely downloaded, and FIG. 61B is a view illustrating an example of setting the tag for the page being downloaded to the tag length in accordance with the downloaded volume;
  • FIG. 62 is a view illustrating an example of controlling the tag display in accordance with the amount of downloaded data in all pages in the configuration as shown in FIG. 60, wherein FIG. 62A is a view illustrating an example of normally displaying the page tag only, and FIG. 62B is a view illustrating an example of normally displaying the page tag by the length of tag in accordance with the volume of one page that has been downloaded;
  • FIG. 63 is an explanatory view illustrating an example of handling the history information in a sixth example of the invention, wherein FIG. 63A is a view illustrating one example of the history information in which the commands for limited operations are memorized, and FIG. 63B is a view illustrating one example of the history information in which the commands for all operations are memorized;
  • FIG. 64 is a flowchart illustrating a page information display control process using the history information
  • FIG. 65 is a perspective view illustrating a computer that is employed in this example.
  • FIG. 66 is an explanatory view illustrating a conventional user interface
  • FIG. 67 show another conventional user interface, in which FIG. 67A is an explanatory view showing the state of selecting the sheet 1 , and FIG. 67B is an explanatory view showing the state of selecting the sheet 2 .
  • a first embodiment involves a process of turning one page
  • a second embodiment involves a process of turning plural pages collectively
  • a third embodiment involves the display format during the page turning process.
  • a fourth embodiment involves associating an operation using a tag with an element in each of the above embodiments. The cases where the page information has plural pages of information, and the page information is downloaded from a server, will be described later by way of example.
  • FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating one example of a page information display method according to the first embodiment of the invention.
  • the page information display method of this embodiment displays the electronic information using an information access device comprising a storage unit (electronic information memory) 4 for storing the electronic information having plural pages of information in a unit of page of predetermined size, a display unit 1 for displaying the electronic information stored in this storage unit in the unit of page, and an operation unit 1 C for inputting an operation to gain access to the page information, the operation unit being provided in the substantially same area as the display unit.
  • a storage unit electronic information memory 4 for storing the electronic information having plural pages of information in a unit of page of predetermined size
  • a display unit 1 for displaying the electronic information stored in this storage unit in the unit of page
  • an operation unit 1 C for inputting an operation to gain access to the page information, the operation unit being provided in the substantially same area as the display unit.
  • the display unit 1 and the operation unit 1 C are integrated.
  • the page information display method comprises a page turning operation detecting step A 1 of outputting a page turning operation detecting signal when a dragging is made on the operation unit in parallel or anti-parallel to a predefined page turning direction at a current page read from the storage unit 4 that is to be displayed at present, a next display page setting step A 2 of setting a preceding page or a succeeding page immediately before or after the current page depending on a direction of the dragging operation to a next display page to be displayed at the next time, when the page turning operation detecting signal is detected in the page turning operation detecting step A 1 , and a page turning process step A 3 of displaying the next display page set in the next display page setting step in place of the current page on the display unit 1 .
  • the page turning operation detecting step A 1 further comprises a page turning operation judging substep of judging, as the page turning operation, an operation exceeding a minimum operation length in the page turning direction within a predefined allowance region in a direction orthogonal to the page turning direction.
  • the next display page setting step sets a page number that is equal to the page number of the current page incremented or decremented by one, depending on the direction of dragging operation, to the next display page.
  • the page turning process step A 3 performs the page turning process to make the next display page a new current page. That is, by dragging a pointer in the page turning direction on the operation unit 1 C, the next page is displayed.
  • the pointer In the case where the pointer is dragged in a direction anti-parallel to the page turning direction, the previous page is displayed.
  • the pointer may be a pointing device of the mouse, or a fingertip of the user.
  • the touch panel 1 In the case where the touch panel 1 is employed to perform the page turning operation, the page turning operation is allowed in a broader area than selecting the area where the tag is displayed.
  • the page turning process involves deleting the current page from the display unit 1 , and displaying the next display page on the display unit 1 .
  • the current page may be gradually reduced, and the next display page may be displayed on the display unit at stages (refer to the third embodiment).
  • the page turning operation detecting step A 4 may further comprise an operation rate calculating substep of calculating a page turning rate that is a speed of the page turning operation
  • the page turning process step A 3 may further comprise a display rate setting substep of setting a display rate corresponding to the page turning rate calculated in the operation rate calculating step to change the display from the current page to the next display page. Consequently, the relation between the page turning operation and the page turning process can be informed to the user more clearly.
  • FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating one example of a page information display device in the first embodiment as shown in FIG. 1, wherein FIG. 2A is a diagram showing the overall configuration, and FIG. 2B is a diagram showing the detailed configuration of a display controller.
  • the page information display device of this embodiment has an electronic information memory 4 for memorizing the electronic information having plural pages of information in a unit of page of predetermined size, a touch panel 1 for displaying the electronic information stored in this electronic information memory 4 in the unit of page, as well as inputting an operation to gain access to the page information, and a display controller 3 for controlling the display of the page information stored in the electronic information memory 4 on the basis of an operation content input into this touch panel 1 .
  • the display controller 3 comprises a page turning operation detecting portion 60 for outputting a page turning operation detecting signal when a dragging is made on the touch panel 1 in parallel or anti-parallel to a predetermined page turning direction 34 at a current page read from the electronic information memory that is to be displayed at present, a next display page setting portion 61 for setting a preceding page or a succeeding page immediately before or after the current page depending on a direction of the dragging operation to a next display page to be displayed at the next time, when the page turning operation detecting signal is output by the page turning operation detecting portion 60 , and a page turning process portion 62 for displaying the next display page set in the next display page setting portion 61 in place of the current page on the touch panel.
  • the process of FIG. 1 can be implemented under the control of the display controller 3 having the above portions.
  • FIG. 3 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of the page turning operation with the configuration as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2.
  • the page information having a one-dimensional structure (book structure) is accessed by turning pages sequentially, whereby the user unfamiliar with the computer operation can acquire the necessary information surely.
  • the process contents of FIGS. 1 and 2 can be realized by a page information display program that is executed under the control of the display controller.
  • the page information display program has the commands corresponding to the configuration as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2.
  • the page information display program comprises, as the commands for operating the display controller 3 , a page turning operation detecting command for outputting a page turning operation detecting signal when a dragging is made on the touch panel in parallel or anti-parallel to a predetermined page turning direction at a current page read from the electronic information memory that is to be displayed at present, a next display page setting command for setting a preceding page or a succeeding page immediately before or after the current page depending on a direction of the dragging operation to a next display page to be displayed at the next time, when the page turning operation detecting signal is output, and a page turning process command for displaying the next display page set in accordance with the next display page setting command in place of the current page on the touch panel.
  • each of the commands is executed by the display controller 3 , the configuration as shown in FIG. 2B is realized, so that the process of FIG. 1 is performed.
  • a command corresponding to the function to be added or changed may be newly introduced.
  • This page information display program is stored in a storage medium 17 such as a CD-ROM, read by a disk drive 16 as shown in FIG. 2A, and stored in a hard disk, not shown.
  • the page display program stored in the hard disk is employed by the display controller 3 .
  • One example of judging the page turning operation or not is a judgment with the change and locus of operated coordinates.
  • the xy coordinates are defined on the display unit (operation unit) 1 , the amount of movement from an input coordinate (Px, Py) when the fingertip first touches at the operation unit 1 C to an input coordinate (PX, PY) to which the fingertip is moved within a fixed time is measured.
  • Px, Py an input coordinate
  • PX, PY input coordinate
  • DY an arbitrary value
  • in the X axis direction is larger than an arbitrary value (DX).
  • the operation in the page turning direction is beyond the arbitrary value (DX), while the amount of movement of pointer in a direction orthogonal to the page turning direction is below the arbitrary value (DY).
  • the next display page setting portion 61 sets the page information of a succeeding page of the current page to the next display page.
  • the value of “PX ⁇ Px” is positive, it sets a preceding page of the current page to the next display page.
  • the operation with the tag or in the information access area may be performed by controlling the number of turning pages or the display rate in continuous display in accordance with the operation rate or pressure. In this way, it is possible to effect the display control in more intricate manner through the more intuitive operation.
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a configuration of the page holding process according to the second embodiment of the invention.
  • the page information display method of the second embodiment comprises a page holding operation detecting step A 11 of outputting a page holding operation detecting signal when a predetermined page holding operation is made at a current page read from the electronic information memory 4 that is to be displayed at present, a holding page number displaying step A 12 of displaying the total number of holding pages in accordance with the amount of the page holding operation on the display unit, when the page holding operation is initially detected in this page holding operation detecting step A 11 , a next display page setting step A 13 of setting a page having a page number that is equal to the current page added or subtracted by the amount of the holding operation to a next display page to be displayed at the next time, when the page holding operation detecting signal is output in the page holding operation detecting step A 11 ,
  • the page holding operation detecting step further comprises a pressure holding page number calculating substep of calculating the number of holding pages in accordance with the magnitude of a pressure applied to the substantially same position of the operation unit 1 C, when the operation unit 1 C is a pressure detecting type, for example.
  • the page holding amount operation detecting step may comprise a time holding page number calculating substep of calculating the number of holding pages in accordance with the elapsed time of a depressing operation that continues at the substantially same position of the operation unit 1 C, instead of the pressure holding page calculating step.
  • an operation of turning plural pages continuously while grasping a book at the ends with a pressure to turn a few pages of the book is metaphorically simulated to realize a process of “holding” plural pages in accordance with a pressure applied on the display unit 1 .
  • the page turning process step A 14 executes a process of turning pages by effecting a page turning operation of moving the fingertip left or right in a state of holding plural pages. If the user holds plural pages but releases hold of the touch panel without effecting the page turning operation, holding plural pages is canceled, and an original operation state is restored.
  • FIG. 5 is an explanatory view illustrating a display example of the number of holding pages with the configuration as shown in FIG. 4, wherein FIG. 5A is a view illustrating a pressure circle, and FIG. 5B is a view illustrating a time circle.
  • the holding page number display step as shown in FIG. 4 comprises a substep of displaying the holding display circles 63 , 64 defined with a radius of the size corresponding to the amount of holding pages on the display unit 1 .
  • the diameter of the circle around the fingertip is increased or decreased in accordance with the magnitude of pressure.
  • the term “in accordance with the magnitude of pressure” not only means that the diameter of circle is proportional to the pressure, but also means that the diameter of circle is increased acceleratively in accordance with the pressure (the number of holding pages is increased).
  • the maximum diameter ( ⁇ ) is set in an initial file, because the number of holding pages may depend on the resolution of a pressure sensor.
  • the radius of the pressure circle can be calculated in accordance with the following expression.
  • the diameter of the time circle unlike the pressure circle, may become infinite unless the maximum diameter is set. In other words, in the case where plural pages are held with the time, it is possible to hold as many turning pages as present.
  • the diameter can be set to be infinite, but because the pressure sensor has a limited resolution, the operation becomes very sensitive, if the diameter is set to be infinite.
  • An algorithm for calculating the diameter of the time circle (corresponding to the pressure circle) is as follows.
  • F elapsed time signifies a function having a variable of the elapsed time. Herein, this function is assumed to be increasing.
  • FIG. 6A is a view illustrating a configuration of a page information display device.
  • the display controller 3 comprises a page holding operation detecting portion 64 for outputting a page holding operation detecting signal when a predetermined page holding operation is performed at a current page read from the electronic information memory 4 that is to be displayed at present, and a holding page number display unit 65 for displaying the total number of holding pages in accordance with the operation amount of the page holding operation on the display unit, when the page holding operation is initially detected by the page holding operation detecting portion.
  • the other configuration is the same as the first embodiment of FIG. 2.
  • the page holding operation detecting portion 64 detects the number of holding pages in accordance with the pressure or elapsed time applied on the operation unit 1 C. And the holding page number display unit 65 displays this holding page number on the display unit 1 .
  • the page information display program comprises a page holding operation detecting command for outputting a page holding operation detecting signal when a predetermined page holding operation is performed at a current page read from the electronic information memory that is to be displayed at present, and a holding page number display command for displaying the total number of holding pages in accordance with the operation amount of the page holding operation on the display unit, when the page holding operation is initially detected upon the page holding operation detecting command.
  • a pressure circle 63 A is displayed on the display unit.
  • the pressure circle 63 A is only drawn with an outer contour, and the article under the circle can be read during the operation.
  • the actual number of holding pages can not be displayed, but the number of holding pages can be approximately grasped in terms of the diameter in this example. Hence, multiple operations may be needed.
  • the number of holding pages is displayed in numerical value inside (or around the circumference of) the pressure circle. In the example as shown in FIG. 6B, four pages are being held, and if the page turning operation is performed in this state, a preceding or succeeding page by four pages before or after the current page is displayed, depending on a direction of the page turning operation.
  • FIG. 7 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of displaying a multiloop with the configuration as shown in FIG. 4.
  • the holding page number displaying step A 12 comprises a substep of displaying a multiloop consisting of a number of circles around the same center and corresponding to the page holding amount.
  • the number of loops increases or decreases like a tree ring with the greater or smaller pressure. Therefore, the loop serves as a memory for holding pages.
  • the number of holding pages is calculated readily by changing the color or the line thickness of loop at every five pages, for example.
  • the color or the line thickness of loop may be changed as a memory at every five pages.
  • FIG. 7B there is a circle indicating the holding in an inner region, with a number of loops corresponding to the number of holding pages around its outer circumference.
  • the multiloop 63 C as shown in FIG. 7B indicates that two pages are being held, and the multiloop 63 C as shown in FIG. 7C indicates that four pages are being held. Also, the circle indicating the holding may be omitted.
  • FIG. 8 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of displaying a coated circle with the configuration as shown in FIG. 4.
  • the holding page number displaying step A 12 comprises a substep of displaying a coated circle defined with a radius of predetermined size, the circle being coated corresponding to the page holding amount.
  • various forms of coating may exist as shown in FIGS. 8 and 9.
  • the coated circle desirably has its diameter varied corresponding to the holding page number in each form of coating, but the number of holding pages may be indicated according to the coating color or the extent of variation. In this case, the coated circle itself has its fixed diameter.
  • FIG. 8A is a view illustrating one example of the coated circle in a solid single color.
  • the content of the page information at the current page can not be read, and hence, this solid coating in single color may be confused with the operation of enlarging part of the page information.
  • FIG. 8B is a view illustrating one example of a coated circle having transparency. If the coated circle is translucent, the article under the coated circle can be read even during the operation of turning plural pages.
  • FIG. 8C is a view illustrating one example of a coated circle having gradation.
  • This display method is suitable employed when the number of holding pages is detected using the pressure.
  • This gradation makes it possible to display the limit of resolution or the current operation state clearly by making dense the color in the central portion in accordance with the magnitude of pressure. Even if the actual pressure distribution is not displayed, this effect can be obtained. That is, if the actual paper face is pressed strongly (i.e., turning more pages corresponds to an action of pressing on the paper face more strongly), the paper face is sunk physically. Therefore, the circle is gradated so that the color is dense (dark) in the central portion with the high pressure, and becomes lighter toward the outside. Thus, the operation state can be displayed excellently. If the coated circle with gradation is translucent, as shown in FIG. 8B, how the paper face is sunk with pressure can be represented.
  • FIG. 9 is an explanatory view illustrating another example of displaying a coated circle with the configuration as shown in FIG. 4.
  • This display method represents a sense of how the paper face is sunk at the fingertip by deforming the paper face three-dimensionally in accordance with the pressure.
  • an outside loop of the coated circle is drawn with the line, but this outside loop can be omitted.
  • the term “three-dimensionally” does not necessarily mean dealing the paper face as the three dimensional graphics, but is met if a sense of sinking can be represented.
  • the image data of a part of the current page drawn with the reference as shown in FIG. 9B may be mapped onto a framework as shown in FIG. 9C or 9 D to represent the deformation caused by the medium pressure or large pressure.
  • the current page being turned and the next display page are displayed effectively to promote an understanding of the correspondence between the operation and process contents by displaying the reaction or process of an access device as a result of operation clearly.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a process example of selecting a display format according to the third embodiment.
  • the page information display method comprises a page turning operation detecting step A 21 of outputting a page turning operation detecting signal having the number of holding pages and a page turning direction defined, when a page turning operation for turning one or more pages is performed in the operation unit, a next display page setting step A 22 of setting a preceding page or a succeeding page by the number of holding pages before or after the current page depending on the page turning direction to a next display page to be displayed at the next time, when the page turning operation is completed in the page turning operation detecting step A 21 and the page turning operation detecting signal is output, and a page turning process step of displaying the next display page set in the next display page setting step A 22 in place of the current page on the display unit.
  • the page turning process step comprises a next display page reading substep A 23 of reading the next display page from the storage unit, when the next display page is set, a turning state display data creating substep A 24 of transforming the current page data making up the current page that is being displayed on the display unit at every unit display time, as well as creating the turning state display data into which the current page is transformed, when the page turning operation detecting signal is output, and a turning state display data overwriting step A 25 of overwriting the turning state display data created in the turning state display data creating substep on the next display data read in the next display page reading substep at every unit display time until the turning state display data is exhausted.
  • the page turning operation detecting step A 21 detects either turning one page in the first embodiment or holding plural pages in the second embodiment. Turning one page can be also considered as the operation of holding one page.
  • the next display page setting step A 22 designates a next display page on the basis of the page turning direction and the number of holding pages detected in the page turning operation detecting step A 21 .
  • the page turning process comprises displaying the next display page at stages, as well as deleting the current page at stages. Therefore, the transformed current page is overwritten on the next display page. There are various ways of transforming the current page.
  • FIG. 11 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the page information display device according to the third embodiment.
  • the page information display device comprises an electronic information memory 4 for memorizing the electronic information having plural pages of information in a unit of page of predetermined size, a touch panel 1 for displaying the electronic information stored in the electronic information memory 4 in the unit of page, as well as inputting an operation to gain access to the page information, and a display controller 3 for controlling the display of the page information stored in the electronic information memory on the basis of an operation content input into the touch panel 1 .
  • the display controller 3 like that of the first embodiment as shown in FIG. 2B, comprises a page turning operation detecting portion 60 for outputting a page turning operation detecting signal with the number of holding pages and a page turning direction defined, when a page turning operation for turning one or more pages is performed on the touch panel, a next display page setting portion 61 for setting a preceding page or a succeeding page by the number of holding pages before or after the current page depending on the page turning direction to a next display page to be displayed at the next time, when the page turning operation is completed in the page turning operation detecting portion 60 and the page turning operation detecting signal is output, and a page turning process portion 62 for displaying the next display page set in the next display page setting portion in place of the current page on the display unit.
  • a page turning operation detecting portion 60 for outputting a page turning operation detecting signal with the number of holding pages and a page turning direction defined, when a page turning operation for turning one or more pages is performed on the touch panel
  • a next display page setting portion 61 for
  • This page turning process portion 62 comprises a next display page reading function 68 of reading the next display page from the electronic information memory, when the next display page is set, a turning state display data creating function 69 of transforming the current page data making up the current page that is being displayed on the touch panel 1 at every unit display time as well as creating the turning state display data into which the current page is transformed, when the page turning operation detecting signal is output, and a turning state display data overwriting function 70 of overwriting the turning state display data created in the turning state display data creating function 69 on the next display page read in the next display page reading function 68 until the turning state display data is exhausted.
  • a page information display program for realizing the page turning process portion as shown in FIG. 11 comprises, as the page turning process commands, a next display page reading command for reading the next display page from the electronic information memory, when the next display page is set, a turning state display data creating command for transforming the current page data making up the current page that is being displayed on the display unit at every unit display time as well as creating the turning state display data into which the current page is transformed, when the page turning operation detecting signal is output, and a turning state display data overwriting command for overwriting the turning state display data created in accordance with the turning state display data creating command on the next display page read in accordance with the next display page reading command at every unit display time until the turning state display data is exhausted.
  • FIG. 12A is a view illustrating one example of the display format of overwriting type.
  • the turning state display data creating step A 24 further comprises an overwriting display control substep of deleting an area on the start point side in the page turning direction at every unit time.
  • the turning state display data 71 A is produced by deleting a current page 71 from the right hand side in the figure at stages. By overwriting this turning state display data 71 A on the next display data 72 , the turning state is displayed. In this overwriting type, the next display data successively appears from the right hand side of the current page.
  • FIG. 12B is a view illustrating one example of the display format of slide type.
  • the turning state display data creating step A 24 comprises a slide display control substep of deleting an area on the end point side in the page turning direction at every unit time as well as shifting the current page data by the amount of deleted area in the page turning direction.
  • the left hand side of the current page data 71 B is deleted in the figure, and the current page data is shifted by the amount of deleted area in the page turning direction.
  • This shifted image data as the turning state display data 71 C is overwritten on the next display page 72 .
  • the current page is slid gradually in the page turning direction so that the next display page 72 appears.
  • FIG. 13A is a view illustrating one example of the display format of compression type.
  • the turning state display data creating step A 24 comprises a compression display control substep of reducing the display length in the page turning direction at every said unit time as well as compressing the current page data to the reduced display length in the page turning direction.
  • the current page is lifted in a normal direction (z axis direction) of the display unit at the end (or left end in the figure) along the page turning direction. If the display area of the current page 71 is reduced and compressed in the page turning direction, the current page has a shape as indicated by reference sign 71 D.
  • the current page has a shape as indicated by reference sign 71 E. If they are overwritten on the next display page 72 , the current page has its shape changed sequentially from a state indicated by reference sign 73 D to a state indicated by reference sign 73 E. Defining ⁇ in the xy plane as shown in FIG. 13A, the current page 71 is transformed so that the change rate (or angular velocity) of ⁇ may be constant. Thereby, the behavior of how the page is turned can be represented dynamically.
  • FIG. 13B is a view illustrating one example of the display format of 3D type.
  • the turning state display data creating step A 24 comprises a three dimensional space defining substep of defining a virtual space in a normal direction of the display unit, a current page rotating substep of rotating the current page within the virtual space around the end point side in the page turning direction, and a three dimensional display control substep of drawing a front side and a back side of the current page rotated virtually in the current page rotating substep in a two dimensional plane as viewed in a normal direction of the display unit as well as setting the drawing data to the turning state display data.
  • FIG. 13B the turning state display data creating step A 24 comprises a three dimensional space defining substep of defining a virtual space in a normal direction of the display unit, a current page rotating substep of rotating the current page within the virtual space around the end point side in the page turning direction, and a three dimensional display control substep of drawing a front side and a back side of the current page rotated virtually in
  • the state of turning the paper in the three-dimensional space is displayed on a two-dimensional plane.
  • a shape as indicated by reference sign 71 G in FIG. 13B there is a shape as indicated by reference sign 71 G in FIG. 13B.
  • the backside of the current page is indicated by reference sign 71 H.
  • the current page is drawn in the two-dimensional plane, and superposed on the next display page 73 F, resulting in a shape as indicated by reference sign 73 G.
  • the current page may be drawn in a state where the content of the current page is seen through the back side, or the content of the next display page is reflected on the back side of the current page.
  • the tag is effectively used for the display of the operation state. That is, in the fourth embodiment, as a method of indicating the total number of pages and the position of the current page as well as enabling an operation of turning the pages intuitively, the tag is employed. Referring to FIGS. 14 to 28 , the method of displaying the tag will be described below, and then the relation between holding plural pages and the tag, and the extended use of the tag in the third embodiment, will be described below.
  • FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a page information display process according to the fourth embodiment of the invention.
  • FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a page information display device which is suitable for practicing this process.
  • a display unit 1 is provided with an information access area 5 for displaying the page information, as shown in FIG. 15.
  • one and other tag display areas 6 , 7 are provided to the left and right, or upward and downward of this information access area 5 .
  • a tag of a page displayed in the information access area is displayed in a right-side tag display area. Beneath this current page tag, a tag for a succeeding page (succeeding page tag 9 ) having a page number greater than a current page is appended. And in a left-hand tag display area, a tag for a preceding page (preceding page tag 10 ) of the current page is appended.
  • the fourth page is displayed.
  • the page information display device comprises a storage unit (electronic information memory) 4 for storing the electronic information having a plurality of pages in a unit of page of predetermined size, a display unit (display) 1 having an information access area 5 for displaying the electronic information stored in the storage unit 4 in a unit of the page and a tag display area 6 , 7 for displaying a tag indicating the content of the page, the tag display area being provided on both ends of the information access area 5 , and a display controller 3 for displaying the page information read from the storage unit 4 , with a tag appended, on the display unit.
  • the display controller executes the process as shown in FIG. 14.
  • the display controller first reads the electronic information of a page designated with page designation information (step S 1 ). Subsequently, the height of a current page tag is determined, on the basis of the page number of read current page (step S 2 , determining the current page tag height). Further, the color and shape of a tag indicating each page preceding and succeeding the current page are determined (step S 3 ). At this step S 3 , the highlighting of current page tag, the tag color or color variation, and the tag shape variation are set.
  • the current page of current display object read from the storage unit is displayed in the information access area at step S 4 .
  • the tag appendant to the current page is displayed in the one or other tag display area at step S 5 (displaying the current page).
  • a tag 9 appendant to each page (fifth to seventh page) following the current page (fourth page in the example of FIG. 15) is displayed in one tag display area (S 6 , displaying the succeeding page tag).
  • a tag appendant to each page preceding the current page in page number is displayed in the other tag display area (S 7 , displaying the preceding page tag).
  • each tag has the tag content displayed, the tag content being a content of tag (step S 8 ).
  • the page number is displayed as the tag content (displaying the page number).
  • a mark or character indicating the place of page may be used.
  • the display controller 3 has a variety of functions to implement the process as shown in FIG. 14. Specifically, it comprises an electronic information display portion 11 for displaying the page information of a current page of current display object read from the storage unit 4 in the information access area 5 , and a current page tag display portion 12 for displaying the current page tag in the one or other tag display area.
  • the display controller 3 further comprises a succeeding tag display portion 13 for displaying a tag appendant to each page following the current page at a position forward of the height of the current page tag in the one tag display area, and a preceding page tag display portion 14 for displaying a tag appendant to each page preceding the current page in page number at a position rearward of the height of current page in the other tag display area.
  • the display controller 3 comprises a tag display mode setting portion 15 for setting the mode of tag (shape and color).
  • the current page tag display portion 12 may have a current page tag height calculating function of calculating the page height of current page, on the basis of the ratio of the page number of current page relative to the total page number of electronic information.
  • the display controller 4 comprises a CPU for executing a page information display program and a RAM which is a main memory of this CPU.
  • the page information display program is stored in a storage medium such as a CD-ROM and carried to the page information display device.
  • the display controller 4 controls a program reading portion 16 such as a CD-ROM drive to read a program and store it in the storage unit 4 . If this page information display program is executed, all or part of the process as shown in FIG. 14 is performed.
  • This page information display program may comprise the commands for operating the display controller 4 including a current page display command for displaying a current page of current display object read from the storage unit 4 in the information access area 5 and displaying a tag appendant to the current page in the one or other tag display area 6 , 7 , a succeeding page tag display command for displaying a tag appendant to each page following the current page in the one tag display area, before or after displaying the current page, and a preceding page tag display command for displaying a tag appendant to each page preceding the page number of the current page in the other tag display area, before or after displaying the current page.
  • the display 1 consists of the information access area 5 and the tag display areas 6 , 7 provided on the both sides of the information access area 5 .
  • the electronic information display portion 11 draws the access information stored in the storage unit 4 in the information access area 5 of the display 1 .
  • the tag display mode setting portion 15 specifies the tag display mode in accordance with the preselected setting.
  • each tag display portion 12 , 13 and 14 draws one sheet with tags 8 , 9 , 10 indicating the tag contents 18 such as the page number appended in the tag display area 6 , 7 , having an appearance with a tag added sheet.
  • the current page tag 8 appended to the current page displayed in the information access area 5 has desirably a specific appearance of color or shape with a highlighted font for the tag content 18 such as the page number, for example, to easily distinguish it from other tags 9 , 10 .
  • Each tag 8 , 9 , 10 is arranged in accordance with the tag content 18 such as the page number.
  • the absolute positional relation of information provided for the computer is clarified by drawing comically the overlapping condition of tags.
  • the tag 10 displayed in one tag display area 6 has a smaller page number than the page number of the current page.
  • the tags are displayed in overlapping condition so that the tag having a greater page number is placed visually in front of the tag having a smaller page number.
  • the tag displayed in the other tag display area 7 has a greater page number than the page number of the current page.
  • the tags are displayed in overlapping condition so that the tag having a greater page number is placed visually in the rear of the tag having a smaller page number.
  • the tag having a greater tag content 18 such as page number is displayed in one tag display area 6
  • the tag having a smaller page number is displayed in the other tag display area 7 .
  • the tags 8 , 9 , 10 are displayed differently in appearance in accordance with the page number of tag, which is an effective drawing method for clarifying the relative positional relation of access information.
  • FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing an initial state of the tag display according to this embodiment of the invention.
  • FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram showing a tag display example in which the fourth page is displayed in the configuration as shown in FIG. 16.
  • the display unit 1 has the information access area 5 and the tag display areas 6 , 7 .
  • the electronic information 1 A stored in the storage unit 4 is displayed in the information access area 5 by reconstructing, as the page information in a unit of page, the amount of information which can be displayed in the information access area 5 .
  • the page information is data in a unit of page of predetermined size.
  • the page information display device arranges the tags 8 , 9 , 10 in the order of the tag content 18 such as the page number, with each tag 8 , 9 , 10 appended to the extremity of each page marking the tag content 18 such as page number, to exhibit that the arrangement of page information has a linear information structure, so that the page information in a unit of page can be superposed in succession like a book.
  • the total page number of electronic information is 7 pages. Seven tags having the length of the tag display area 7 divided by the page number 7 are displayed. In order to overlap the tags, as shown in FIG. 16, this tag length is equal to the length divided plus the overlapping length.
  • the height or position of tag in a tag display direction may be determined, on the basis of the ratio of the page number of current page to the total page number of electronic information, at a step S 2 of determining the current page tag height as shown in FIG. 15.
  • the page number of the page with the tag appended is displayed as the tag content indicated within the tag at a step S 8 of displaying the page number. Accordingly, the number appended to the tag in FIG. 16 is the page number of electronic information. As shown in FIG. 16, even in the case where the page information is accessed using only one information access area 5 , the tag having the page number is displayed in the tag display area, so that the user can see intuitively the total amount or depth of electronic information. And in the example of marking the tags 8 , 9 , 10 with the page number, unlike the tag having the heading information marked, there is no problem that the page number can not be fully written in the tags 8 , 9 , 10 . Of course, if there is a sufficient space in the tag display area 6 , 7 , an icon or the like suggesting the content of character information or page information may be attached.
  • the current page tag 8 Before or after the step SB of displaying the page number, the current page tag 8 may be highlighted. In the example as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the bold character is used as the font of current page tag.
  • the succeeding page tags 9 a to 9 f are lower level tags.
  • the order is such that the tag is at lower level as the page leaves away from the current page. Accordingly, the current page tag 8 is at the uppermost level.
  • the tags 9 a , 9 b , . . . , 9 f are placed at lower level in the order of 9 a , 9 b , . . . , 9 f .
  • the overlapping of tags is such that the lowermost tag 9 f is at the lowest level, and the tags are overlapped in the order of 9 e , 9 d , . . . , 9 a .
  • the preceding page tags are transferred to the one tag display area 6 in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, rather than changing the overlapping relation only in the other tag display area 7 .
  • the position of current page relative to the total page number of electronic information can be quickly and correctly informed to the user.
  • a tag 10 c indicating a previous page (third page) of the current page is at the uppermost level, and the tag having smaller page number is placed at the lower level.
  • the depth of electronic information can be represented.
  • the hierarchical relation is such that the current page is at the uppermost level, and the page is positioned at lower level as the absolute value of a difference between the page number of the page and the current page number increases. Therefore, at a step of defining the tag relation, the current page tag 8 or the page tag preceding or succeeding the current page is at the uppermost level, and the page is positioned at lower level as the absolute value of a difference between the current page and the page for appending the tag increases.
  • the upper level tag overlaps the lower level tag in the one or other tag display area in accordance with the hierarchy of the page defined at the step of defining the tag relation.
  • the depth of page can be visualized on the tag display area 6 , 7 by comically drawing the overlapping of tags.
  • the tag 8 , 9 , 10 indicating the tag content 18 such as the page number is appended to the page information, which is then displayed in the tag display area 6 , 7 .
  • the tag 8 , 9 , 10 can be directly designated.
  • the page information corresponding to the tag content 18 such as the page number for the tag 8 , 9 , 10 is displayed in the information access area 5 . Then, the display mode for the tag 8 , 9 , 10 appended to the page information is changed, thereby making it possible to easily grasp the amount of information or the information structure provided for the computer. This is because the comparison between the number of tags in one tag display area 6 and that in the other tag display area 7 is visually easily made as shown in FIG. 15.
  • an input operation for accessing the page information such as turning the page in the information access area 5 .
  • a pointing device for the input operation with a fingertip such as a touch panel over the tag display area 6 , 7 for input, there is provided a user interface which enables an access operation to be performed intuitively with the gesture of turning the page.
  • an access area and an operation area are provided in the display area on an output device of the computer to enable the electronic information displayed in the information access area to be fully listed. Further, the amount of information which can be displayed in the information access area is appropriately drawn by appending the tag indicating the page number to the electronic information in a unit of page, with the overlapping of tags. Therefore, the user can easily grasp visually the electronic information arranged for each page. The user unfamiliar with the computer can also easily understand the information structure in the order of pages for the electronic information.
  • the user can easily grasp visually the absolute position of the page being currently accessed with respect to the amount of information provided for the computer in the order of arranging the tags. And the user can also easily grasp the relative position between the page or chapter being currently accessed and the arbitrary page or chapter, using the order of arranging the tags.
  • FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for defining the terms such as “tag width” for use in the present specification. Normally, in the English text or Japanese text written laterally, the characters are written from left to right and the page is turned from right to left. On the other hand, for the Japanese text written vertically, the page is turned from right to left. Also, in the case where the A4 sheets of paper for a report are fastened at the upper side, the page is turned from bottom to top. In this way, the direction of turning the pages may exist in the books, reports or magazines.
  • a term “page turning direction” referred to above means one direction as indicated by reference numeral 34 , or a direction of turning the page from right to left in FIG. 18.
  • the page turning direction is typically parallel (or anti-parallel) to the character writing direction, or orthogonal to it.
  • a term “tag display direction” is defined as a direction orthogonal to the page turning direction.
  • the tag is displayed along this tag display direction 35 .
  • the tag display direction is from top to bottom.
  • the tag display direction is from left to right as shown in FIG. 14.
  • a term “tag length” is defined as a distance from the start point of tag to the end point in the tag display direction.
  • a term “tag width” is defined as a length of tag in the page turning direction. Accordingly, if the tag length and the tag width are determined, the size required to display one tag can be determined. In this embodiment, the position of arranging the tag is variable along the tag display direction, depending on various elements.
  • a term “tag height” can be defined as a length from one end point in the tag display direction. When the tag is trapezoid, the elements specifying one tag are “tag length”, “tag width” and “tag height”, as far as the angle of trapezoidal side face is determined.
  • the electronic information 1 A or electronic information 1 B has the total page number which is variable depending on its contents.
  • the length in the tag display direction divided by the total page number is equal to a tag length.
  • the tag length is too short to effect a simple uniform allocation.
  • solving means for favorably effecting the tag display when the total page number is large is shown.
  • the tag is drawn by gradually narrowing the interval between adjacent tags up to a certain page at the height proportional to the absolute value of a difference in the page number between the tag associated with the access area and other tags as shown in FIG. 20 (semantic display).
  • the tags beyond the certain page range are superposed and drawn densely with a fixed tag interval.
  • the tags for the current page and its neighboring pages can excellently have the tag content such as page number, and the position of the current page relative to the total page number is clear. Further, an interface which enables the user to detect the total page number at a glance can be constructed.
  • the length of a current page tag 8 appendant to the current page is determined by referring to the tag length as the reference (step S 41 , a step of calculating the tag length). Subsequently, the length of each tag is set to be shorter at lower hierarchical level, with the tag length of the current page tag 8 as the maximum value (step S 41 , a step of creating the semantic display). And when the length of tag display area is too insufficient for the total page number, a line tag display 51 A is set for a certain range (step S 43 , a step of setting the line tag). And the tags are displayed semantically (step S 44 ).
  • an interval display line for changing the thickness of tag contour line may be inserted at every page intervals (a step of inserting the interval display line).
  • the tag content such as page number is displayed for the tag capable of indicating the tag content in accordance with the tag length and the font size for display (step S 46 ). Further, the page information of current page is displayed in the information access area.
  • the current page is the 28th page.
  • the tag length of this current page tag 8 is shorter in the order of tags 9 a , 9 b , . . . , 9 e .
  • the tag length is 0.8 times the previous one for each tag from the current page to effect the semantic display.
  • the line tags which have only lower lines displayed are also implemented by this multiplier of 0.8. If the resolution of the display can not follow the line interval of tag, the tags are continuously displayed by the line. In the example of FIG.
  • the previous and next tag lengths are 0.8 times the current tag length, with the tag length of the current page tag 8 in the other tag display area 7 as the reference.
  • the tag length which is displayed at the uppermost level (tag for 27th page) in the one tag display area is equal to the tag length indicating the 29th page. In this way, by making the tag length of the previous page shorter than the tag length of the current page, the current page tag is highlighted, with more deepness.
  • the semantic display as shown in FIG. 20 may be made at any time, irrespective of the total page number of page information. But in the case where the total page number is small, the semantic display may impede the effective use of the tag display area. Therefore, it is desirable to switch between the normal display as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 and the semantic display as shown in FIG. 20 in accordance with the total page number of page information. This switching of display mode can be made based on the minimum reference length of the current page tag. That is, when all the tags are allocated over the entire length of the tag display area in the tag display direction, as shown in FIG. 16, the semantic display may be effected, as far as the tag length per tag is below the reference length.
  • FIG. 21 is a table showing a data structure of the page information display data required to switch between these display modes.
  • the minimum reference length is simply determined by the number of dots, as shown in FIG. 21A, when the physical length and resolution of the display are predetermined.
  • an input of the physical length and the number of dots for display may be accepted at the time of execution, and the minimum reference length may be determined by the physical length in meter or the like. In this way, the user can use uniformly various apparatuses in respect of different page turning operations or different displays of deepness using the tag.
  • the sense of deepness can be represented corresponding to the total number of pages, even if the tag display area is not necessarily provided on the left and right sides.
  • the tag display area is desirably provided on the left and right sides.
  • the page information display data includes the display dot number data of the display unit in each of the page turning direction and the tag display direction, the total page number data of electronic information stored in the storage unit, the dot number data per unit tag which is equal to the number of dots in the dot number data divided by the total page number in the total page number data, and the minimum reference data having the minimum reference width of tag which is predetermined for the tag length in the page turning direction and the minimum reference length of tag which is predetermined for the tag length in the tag display area, which are in comparison with the number of dots per unit tag.
  • the minimum reference data having the minimum reference width of tag which is predetermined for the tag length in the page turning direction and the minimum reference length of tag which is predetermined for the tag length in the tag display area, which are in comparison with the number of dots per unit tag.
  • the length of unit tag is selected to a larger value between 80 dots which is the minimum reference length and the value of 1600 dots divided by the total page number ap. Using this data, it is possible to determine the tag length of current page tag, and switch between the normal display and the semantic display.
  • the minimum reference length is selected to a larger value between 2 cm or the value of the tag display area length divided by the total number page ap.
  • the page information manager 43 can obtain the physical length per dot from the relation between the display dot number data and the tag display area length, and thereby the number of dots per unit tag length.
  • the page information display data may have the tag ratio data which is referred to when the dot number data per unit tag is shorter than the minimum reference data.
  • This tag ratio data is a ratio of the tag length varied successively from the current page of electronic information to the end page or start page relative to the tag length of the minimum reference data. And the tag length is calculated successively from higher to lower hierarchy by referring to this tag ratio data. Then, the tag is overwritten in the tag display area from lower to higher hierarchy. In this way, the tags can be overlapped well.
  • the line tag is automatically produced in accordance with the resolution. Consequently, a consistent interface can be constructed.
  • FIG. 22 is a functional block diagram showing the configuration for designating the tag shape using the page information display data as shown in FIG. 21.
  • a storage unit 4 for storing the electronic information having a plurality of pages in a unit of page of predetermined size
  • a display 49 having an information access area 5 for displaying the electronic information stored in the storage unit 4 in a unit of the page
  • a page information display portion 56 for enabling the electronic information stored in the storage unit 4 to be read on the basis of the page specifying information externally input, and displayed in the information access area.
  • the display 49 has a tag display area 6 provided along with the information access area on one end or both ends in the page turning direction to turn the page of page information in the information access area 5 . Further, it comprises a tag shape calculating portion for calculating the length of tag appendant to each page in the tag display direction on the basis of the length of tag display area in the tag display direction which is orthogonal to the page turning direction, and the total page number ap of electronic information stored in the storage unit 4 , and a tag display portion 55 for displaying the tag in the tag display area on the basis of the length of tag which is calculated by this tag shape calculating portion.
  • the tag shape calculating portion comprises a tag display area width determining portion 53 for determining the width of the tag display area, on the basis of the minimum reference width of tag and the size of electronic information in the page turning direction, for example. For example, if the residual length of the page turning area when the longitudinal length of page information is enlarged or reduced to the longitudinal length of the display is below the minimum reference width, the enlargement or reduction ratio of page information may be changed.
  • the tag shape calculating portion comprises a current page tag length setting portion 54 for setting the tag length of current page to the tag length per unit tag which is the length of the display 49 in the tag display direction, divided by the total page number ap of electronic information, and setting the length of current page tag appendant to the page being currently displayed to the minimum reference length, when the tag length is shorter than the minimum reference length of tag.
  • the tag length of current page is set to the minimum reference length, the semantic display is made in this example. Or otherwise, the normal display is made.
  • a tag table (or the page information display data as shown in FIG. 21) containing the minimum reference width of tag in the page turning direction and the minimum reference length of tag in the tag display direction which are predetermined on the basis of the size of the display 49 is stored in the storage unit 4 .
  • the tag display portion 55 may display the tag having a width determined by the tag display area width determining portion 53 and a length determined by the current page tag length setting portion 54 in the tag display area.
  • a program for calculating the tag length using the page display information of the data structure as shown in FIG. 21, has a tag length calculation command for calculating the length of each tag appendant to each page in the tag display direction on the basis of the length of tag display area in the tag display direction and the total page number ap of electronic information stored in the storage unit 4 , and a tag display command for displaying the tag in the tag display area on the basis of the length of each tag calculated in accordance with the tag length calculation command.
  • the tag length calculation command contains a subcommand for effecting translation between the physical length and the number of dots, if the minimum reference length of FIG. 21B is the physical length.
  • FIG. 23 is s flowchart showing a process of determining the tag width and the tag length using the data of the data structure as shown in FIG. 21B.
  • the physical length information of the display 49 in the page turning direction is acquired (step S 51 , a step of acquiring the physical length).
  • the minimum reference width of tag at the resolution of the display is calculated on the basis of the physical length information acquired at step S 51 of acquiring the physical length and the minimum reference width of tag in the page turning direction which is predetermined by the physical length (minimum tag width calculation step).
  • the width of the tag display area is determined on the basis of the minimum reference width dependent on the display 49 calculated at step S 52 of calculating the minimum tag width and the size of electronic information (step S 52 of determining the tag display area width).
  • step S 53 a step of acquiring the physical length.
  • the minimum reference length of tag at the resolution of the display is calculated on the basis of the physical length information acquired at step S 53 of acquiring the physical length and the minimum reference length of tag in the tag display direction which is predetermined by the physical length (minimum tag length calculation step).
  • step S 54 a step of setting the current page tag length
  • the tag having a width determined at step S 52 of determining the tag display area width and a length determined at step S 54 of setting the current page tag length is displayed in the tag display area (step S 55 , tag display step).
  • the tag having an excellent shape can be displayed without being dependent on the resolution.
  • FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a process of switching between the normal display and the semantic display.
  • the total page number of electronic information is acquired in starting the display of page information (step S 61 ).
  • the tag length per tag is calculated by dividing the number of dots in the tag display direction by the total page number (step S 62 ). Then, a comparison is made between the calculated tag length and the minimum reference tag length as shown in FIG. 21 for example. If the calculated tag length is longer, the normal display is effected (step S 64 ). On the other hand, if the calculated tag length is shorter than the minimum tag length, the semantic display with a multiplier of 0.8 is effected (step S 65 ).
  • the page information display device for enabling the selection of the display mode may comprise, in addition to the configuration of FIG. 22, a tag display mode selecting portion for selecting the normal display in which the length of tag to be displayed in the tag display area is a fixed length, when the total page number of electronic information is a predetermined number or less, or selecting the semantic display in which the tag length is reduced stepwise from the current page tag, when the total page number exceeds the predetermined number.
  • FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a process for redisplaying the tag after turning the page.
  • the tag height of current page is calculated (step S 71 ).
  • This step S 71 of calculating the current page tag height calculates the height of current page tag appendant to the current page number of current display object, on the basis of the ratio of the current page to the total page number of electronic information.
  • the height of tag once displayed is not changed.
  • the semantic display the height of current page tag is changed in accordance with the page number of current page to be displayed.
  • the current page read from the storage unit 4 is displayed in the information access area.
  • the tag appendant to the current page is displayed in the one or other tag display area 6 , 7 at a current page tag height calculated at step S 71 of calculating the current page tag height (step S 72 of displaying the current page tag).
  • the tag 9 appendant to each page succeeding the current page is displayed in the one tag display area 9 at a smaller height than the current page tag height (step S 73 of displaying the succeeding page tag).
  • the tag appendant to each page preceding the page number of current page is displayed in the other tag display area 10 at a larger height than the height of current page tag (step S 74 of displaying the preceding page tag).
  • the procedure waits for an operation of turning the page (step S 75 ). Further, when there is the operation of turning the page, the page turning is displayed like animation with the tag appended to the page being turned, while maintaining the tag height of current page tag, as shown in FIG. 26 (step S 76 ). Then, the page after being turned is set as the current page (step S 77 ).
  • a process after resetting the current page is different between the normal display and the semantic display. That is, in the semantic display (step S 78 ), the tag height of current page is recalculated on the basis of the ratio of the current page to the total page number (step S 71 of redisplaying the same ratio height tag). On the other hand, in the normal display, the current page tag is displayed while maintaining the height of each tag (step S 72 of redisplaying the same height tag). Thereafter, this process is repeated.
  • a page display program for implementing this process may have, for example, a tag length calculation command, a normal display command, a semantic display command, and a tag height control command.
  • the tab length calculation command calculates the tag length per tag on the basis of the total page number information of electronic information and the length of the tag display area.
  • the normal display command sets the calculated tag length to a display tag length when the calculated tag length is above a predetermined tag length.
  • the semantic display command sets the predetermined tag length to the tag length of current page when the calculated tag length is below the predetermined tag length and sets the length of tag appended to each page preceding and succeeding the current page to a shorter length stepwise, with the tag length of current page at the uppermost level.
  • the tag height control command redisplays the tag at the constant height of each tag during the normal display or by calculating the tag height on the basis of the page number of a new current page during the semantic display when there is an operation of turning the current page displayed in the information access area.
  • the semantic display command may be initiated when the normal display command can not be executed. Since the tag height control command requires the information of whether the normal display or the semantic display is made, a flag indicating the current display mode may be stored in the page table 41 .
  • the current page that is the fourth page is turned when the fourth page is displayed. Then, the fifth page is displayed.
  • the display area of the page being turned is reduced gradually and the display area of a new page to be displayed next is increased gradually in the example of FIG. 26.
  • This display example involves various patterns, which may be selected in accordance with the display processing ability of the controller for use. For example, if the controller can perform a high speed 3D processing (with the CPU and operating system), the state of turning the paper may be displayed in the three dimensions. Also, the page may be revolved around the tag display area 6 in the tag display direction as a central axis while the data being displayed is transformed in accordance with the turning movement.
  • the page information display method of this example includes a page turning step of moving the current page in the page turning direction, and displaying a page to be displayed by a tag operation in the information access area, when the tag operation is applied to a tag displayed in the tag display area, and a tag moving step of moving the tag appended to the current page between the one and other tag display areas in the page turning direction along with the movement of the current page, when the current page is moved at the page turning step.
  • the tag shape may be deformed and moved while following the page. For example, if the tag width is made gradually slender, the behavior of the page moving upward with the rotation can be represented.
  • FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a process of expanding the tag during the semantic display.
  • the tag is on the semantic display (step S 81 ).
  • a tag being displayed is designated near the coordinate at which the pointer event occurs, for example, when a pointer 2 A comes closer to the tag display area which is selectively displayed.
  • the pointer indicated by reference sign 2 A comes closer to a line tag indicating the 48th page among the line tags displayed and designates it.
  • the lengths of the tag indicating the 48th page and its preceding or succeeding three or five tags are reset to substantially as long as the tag length of current page and displayed (step S 84 of expanding the tag). Then, the page information of the 48th page may be stored in the cache memory.
  • step S 85 If there is no tag operation (step S 85 ), the tag display is restored after the elapse of a certain time (step S 87 ) On the other hand, if there is any operation on the expanded tag displayed, the processing such as turning the page is performed (step S 86 ).
  • a program for executing the processing as shown in FIG. 27 may have a tag expanding command for resetting the tag length displayed on the basis of the relation between the tag displayed in the tag display area and the coordinate or pressure of the pointer, and a tag length return command for returning the tag length resets to its original length after the elapse of a certain time since the coordinate or pressure of the pointer returns to the steady state.
  • a tag which is located closest to the pointer 2 A (tag of the 49th page in FIG. 28) when the distance h between the tag and the input cursor is below a certain distance H1 is drawn at a height inversely proportional to the distance h with a gradually wider interval between tags as the coordinate of an input cursor comes closer to the tag (tag of the 49th page).
  • the change of the interval between tags as shown in FIG. 28 gradually returns to a display state of FIG. 20, after the elapse of a fixed time from exceeding it.
  • FIG. 29A is a view illustrating one example of the display format of tag integral type.
  • the turning state display data creating step as designated at step A 24 in FIG. 10 comprises a substep of creating the turning state display data having a tag portion along with the current page in the case where the tag is appended to the current page.
  • the display of compression type as shown in FIG. 13A is effected along with a tag 74 A appended to the current page. Because of the compression type, the tag width of the tag 74 B in which the page is more compressed is narrower than the tag width of the tag 74 A.
  • FIG. 29B is a view illustrating one example of the display format of plural pages integral type.
  • the turning state display data creating step A 24 as shown in FIG. 10 comprises a substep of deferring the transformation of each held page until transformation of the current page for each of the pages held in the case where the number of holding pages detected in the page turning operation detecting step is two or greater.
  • FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating one example of a tag display control in accordance with a holding operation according to the fourth embodiment of the invention.
  • the page information display method comprises a page holding operation detecting step A 31 of outputting a page holding operation detecting signal, when a predetermined page holding operation is performed at a current page read from the electronic information memory 4 that is to be displayed at present, and a before-turning holding object page tag coloring step A 42 of coloring a tag for a holding object page that is held by the page holding operation with a different color from other tags in one tag display area that is displaying a tag appended to the current page, when the page holding operation is initially detected in the page holding operation detecting step A 31 .
  • the tag of the page actually held by the page holding operation is colored, whereby the user can confirm the effect on the number of holding pages by the holding operation due to the pressure or time at a glance.
  • the coloring of the tag is confirmed while the pressure is being changed minutely, thereby making the operation more correct and simpler.
  • the page information display method further comprises a next display page setting step A 34 of setting a page having a page number that is equal to the current page added or subtracted by the amount of holding operation to a next display page to be displayed at the next time, when the page holding operation detecting signal is output in the page holding operation detecting step A 31 , and a page turning process step A 35 of displaying the next display page set in this next display page setting step A 34 in place of the current page on the display unit.
  • the page information display method further comprises, following the page turning process step A 35 , an after-turning holding object page tag coloring step A 36 of coloring a page tag for the holding object page, for which the page turning process is completed, in the other tag display area where a tag appended to a current page that has become the new current page after the page turning process is not displayed, with a different color from other tags.
  • FIG. 31 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of the holding operation on the tag. As shown in FIG. 31, holding plural pages is effected by applying a predetermined pressure on a tag 76 that has been expanded.
  • a holding display circle may be displayed on the tag.
  • the coloring of tag by the holding operation and the display of the holding display circle on the tag are employed at the same time.
  • the succeeding pages of the current page, or the pages after the expanded tag are only held, the preceding page can be held if the same operation is performed in the tag display area 6 at the preceding page. That is, the pages 77 held in FIG. 32 are pages before the tag being operated currently. On the other hand, in an example as shown in FIG. 33, the pages 77 held are the pages after the tag being operated currently.
  • FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating one example of the tag display when an operation of turning plural pages collectively is performed.
  • the page information display method comprises a current page tag height calculating step A 41 of calculating a display height of the current page tag on the basis of the position of the current page with respect to the total number of pages for the electronic information stored in the storage unit 4 , a succeeding page tag display format designating step A 42 of designating a display format of the succeeding page tags on the basis of the tag height of the current page tag calculated in the current page tag height calculating step and the total number of succeeding pages, and a preceding page tag display format designating step A 43 of designating a display format of the preceding page tags on the basis of the tag height of the current page tag and the total number of preceding pages before or after the succeeding page tag display format designating step.
  • Each of the display format designating steps A 42 , A 43 may designate the display format in accordance with the tag display method as described in the fourth embodiment. That is, giving the highest priority to a position of the current page tag height, the display format is determined depending on the number of residual pages at this position.
  • the page information display method further comprises a page holding operation detecting step A 44 of outputting a page holding operation detecting signal, when a predetermined page holding operation is performed at the current page, a next display page setting step A 45 of setting a page having a page number that is equal to the current page added or subtracted by the amount of holding operation to a next display page to be displayed at the next time, when the page holding operation detecting signal is output in the page holding operation detecting step A 44 , and page turning process steps A 46 to A 49 of displaying the next display page set in the next display page setting step in place of the current page on the display unit.
  • a page turning process is started (step S 46 ).
  • the display control of the holding object page tag is made (step A 47 ).
  • This display control step of the holding object page tag comprises displaying the tags appended to the current page that is to be turned and the holding object pages that are held by the holding operation in the display format in accordance with the page turning direction specified in the preceding page tag display format designating step A 42 or the succeeding page tag display format designating step A 43 in the information access area, while following the transformation or movement of the current page in the current page turning step.
  • the page turning step is made (step A 48 ). Further, the display control step A 47 of the holding object page tag is repeated until the page turning process is completed (step A 49 ).
  • the next display page is treated as the current page, and the tag height is recalculated to redisplay the tag in the tag display area for the succeeding page.
  • the tags appended to the pages from the current page being moved by the page turning process to the last page of the holding object pages are displayed in accordance with the display format for the previous page, while following the movement of the page turning process.
  • the page information display method further comprises, following the page holding operation detecting step A 44 , a before-turning holding object page tag coloring step of coloring a tag for a holding object page that is held by the page holding operation with a different color from other tags in one tag display area that is displaying a tag appended to the current page, when the page holding operation is initially detected in the page holding operation detecting step A 44 .
  • a before-turning holding object page tag coloring step of coloring a tag for a holding object page that is held by the page holding operation with a different color from other tags in one tag display area that is displaying a tag appended to the current page, when the page holding operation is initially detected in the page holding operation detecting step A 44 .
  • FIG. 36 is an explanatory view for highlighting the tag display in the information access area in the process of turning plural pages collectively as shown in FIG. 34.
  • the holding object page tag display control step A 47 comprises a substep of setting the tags appended to the current page that becomes the turning process object and the holding object pages held in the holding operation in a display format of equal and close interval between tags.
  • the tags are set in the display format in which the interval between tags is close and equal, the position of the current page after being turned can be clarified promptly while the state of turning plural pages collectively is displayed excellently.
  • FIG. 37 is an explanatory view illustrating a tag display example after completion of turning plural page collectively.
  • the page information display method further comprises, following the page turning process step A 49 , an after-turning holding object page tag coloring step of coloring a page tag for the holding object page, for which the page turning process is completed, in the other tag display area where a tag appended to a current page that has become the new current page after the page turning process is not displayed, with a different color from other tags.
  • this after-turning holding object page tag coloring step Owing to the provision of this after-turning holding object page tag coloring step, the original position of page is apparently seen in the case where plural pages are turned collectively, and particularly as the position is visually memorized, the original page is easily restored after turning pages with the holding operation.
  • FIG. 38 is an explanatory view illustrating an example in which a pressure circle is displayed over a tag
  • FIG. 38A is a view illustrating an example of a left page tag
  • FIG. 38B is a view illustrating an example of a right page tag
  • FIG. 38C is a view illustrating an example in which the tag coloring and the tag pressure circle are employed at the same time.
  • FIG. 38A is a view illustrating an example of a left page tag
  • FIG. 38B is a view illustrating an example of a right page tag
  • FIG. 38C is a view illustrating an example in which the tag coloring and the tag pressure circle are employed at the same time.
  • the page information display method further comprises, following the page holding operation detecting step A 44 , a tag holding circle display step of displaying a circle 78 corresponding to the number of holding object pages in the page holding operation over a tag for which the page holding operation is detected, when the page holding operation is initially detected in the page holding operation detecting step A 44 .
  • a tag holding circle display step of displaying a circle 78 corresponding to the number of holding object pages in the page holding operation over a tag for which the page holding operation is detected, when the page holding operation is initially detected in the page holding operation detecting step A 44 .
  • FIG. 39 is an explanatory view illustrating an example in which a holding object page is changed depending on an operation direction upon the tag, wherein FIG. 39A is a view illustrating one example of holding a previous page, and FIG. 39B is a view illustrating one example of holding a succeeding page.
  • FIG. 39 it is determined whether to hold the preceding page or the succeeding page, depending on whether the fingertip is moved upward or downward with reference to the time when the plural pages turning operation is made effective by the fingertip pointing to the page tag.
  • the range for moving the fingertip upward or downward is within one tag. Hence, it is possible to distinguish this operation from the continuous page turning by dragging the tag.
  • the number of holding pages is determined in accordance with the magnitude of pressure to execute the plural pages turning operation.
  • FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing the configuration of hardware resources of this example, which is common to the following examples.
  • a page information display device of this example comprises an input unit 2 for inputting a pointer event and a storage unit 4 for storing a variety of sorts of information, as shown in FIG. 40.
  • An output unit 49 is provided along with a display manager 44 which is a display driver for controlling this output unit 49 and a primary storage unit 46 for storing the image data of one screen or two screens on the display unit.
  • the input unit 2 is provided along with an access operation manager 45 for issuing an access operation command to the display manager, on the basis of a pointer event which has occurred in the input unit 2 , and a timer 48 for clocking the elapsed time during this access operation.
  • the storage unit 4 stores the page information and the tag displayed on a display 1 , the electronic information 1 A which is the page information of plural pages, the page information 1 B having the amount of information by which the electronic information 1 A can be displayed in the information access area 5 in a unit of page, and a page table 41 containing the configuration of this access information 1 B.
  • the storage unit 4 has the electronic information 1 A stored in a universal file format such as a text format, a word processor document format, an image format, an HTML format, an XML format, a PDF format, or a scanned image format.
  • a universal file format such as a text format, a word processor document format, an image format, an HTML format, an XML format, a PDF format, or a scanned image format.
  • the electronic information 1 A described herein is available, even when it is stored in a storage device at the remote location which is connected via the telephone line or a network such as LAN.
  • Such electronic information 1 A is converted into a liner image file by a page converter 42 in this example.
  • the page information is in the image format which is a bit map format, a TIFF format, a PICT format, a JPEG format, or a GIF format.
  • the page table 41 has index information in which the tag content 18 such as page number corresponds to the page information one to one. Since the page information involves image information, the access information is passed through the page converter 42 having a copyright protection feature to embed an electronic openwork. This process can be easily implemented on the configuration of the page information display device.
  • a page information manager 43 manages the data structure or order of the access information 1 B which is then converted by the page converter 42 with reference to the page table 41 . In the example of displaying the newspaper, more articles of information may be possibly defined within one page of page information.
  • the page information display device in this example comprises a high speed primary storage 46 for display, a secondary storage 47 which functions as a prefetch cache for display, and the page information manager 43 for managing the predetermined page information to be read from the storage unit 4 in accordance with the page being displayed at present or the access operation and stored in the secondary storage 47 These can improve the responsibility to the access operation.
  • the input unit 2 may be a device which enables the input operation to be made, while simulating the sense of turning the page of a book with a fingertip as faithfully as possible, such as a touch panel, in this example.
  • the display 1 may be a device enabling the display of high-resolution. It is preferable that an input area of the input unit 2 covers the tag display area 6 , 7 of the display 1 , thereby providing the input area and the tag display area 6 , 7 integrally.
  • the access of electronic information is enabled sufficiently. This does not necessarily mean that the touch panel or the high resolution output device must be used.
  • FIGS. 40 and 41 are flowcharts showing the outline of the operation in this example.
  • the page information manager 43 confirms the capacity of the secondary storage 47 (step S 21 ).
  • the page information manager 43 confirms the presence or absence of the electronic information 1 A and the page table 41 (step S 22 ).
  • the page information manager 43 manages the page converter to convert the electronic information 1 A into the page information 1 B, when the electronic information 1 A exists in the storage unit 4 and the page table 41 does not exist in the storage 4 .
  • the page converter 42 firstly checks the file format of the electronic information 1 A (step S 23 ).
  • the amount of information which can be displayed in the information access area 5 is automatically converted into the page information in a unit of page (step S 24 ). This conversion process will be described later in detail as the related art.
  • the page information manager 43 determines the tag content 18 such as page number for the page information in the order of creating the page information, and registers the electronic information 1 A as the page information in the page table 41 (step S 25 ).
  • step S 24 the electronic information 1 A in different file formats is made accessible as one book having a linear information structure.
  • the page table 41 can be rewritten and changed without departing from the linear information structure accessible in this example.
  • the access information to be displayed on the display 1 is stored in the primary storage 46 which has the highest speed in reading or writing the information.
  • the secondary storage 47 having a higher speed in reading and writing the information than the storage unit 4 has stored the access information for the user to access at the next time. Therefore, if the page to be displayed by the access operation is determined, the page table 41 is referred to (step S 26 ).
  • a page to be displayed is stored in the primary storage 46 (step S 27 )
  • the previous and next pages are stored in the secondary storage 47 (step S 28 ). This is to enable the high-speed display by transferring the page information from the secondary storage 47 to the primary storage 46 , when the page information requested by the display manager 44 is in the secondary storage 47 . If the page information requested by the display manager 44 is not present in the secondary storage 47 , the page information is taken from the access information in the storage unit 4 and stored in the primary storage 46 .
  • the tag 8 , 9 , 10 appendant to the page is drawn in the tag display area (step S 31 ). And the page information stored in the primary storage 46 is displayed in the information access area 5 . Subsequently, the procedure waits for an input into the input unit 3 such as a touch panel (step S 33 ).
  • the access operation manager 45 judges the content of operation to pass the sort of access to the display manager 44 (step S 34 ).
  • the sorts of access may include, for example, turning the page one after another, switching promptly from the accessed page to another page, turning the pages in a certain range roughly, and displaying only the desired article contained in the electronic information over the entire access area in full.
  • the page information to be displayed in the information access area 5 is determined from the sort of access. For example, when there is a request to the page information manager 43 of storing the access information to be displayed in the primary storage 46 , another page information for the user to access newly at the next time is retrieved from the storage unit 4 and stored in the secondary storage 47 , if the access information stored in the primary storage 46 can be passed from the secondary storage 47 (step S 35 ).
  • the secondary storage 47 should store more succeeding pages of the currently displayed page, thereby resulting in higher hit rate because the access is typically made in an ascending direction of page number.
  • a pointer event such as expanding the tag, as will be described later, the page subjected to tag expansion may be read beforehand, and stored in the secondary storage 47 .
  • the page information having a size of one page is a minimum unit of data.
  • each article may be displayed in enlargement. This may be done by enlarging the information of a book or the like, or the illustration in the book. Such enlargement may be performed in such a way as to create beforehand the page information itself at high resolution and enlarge the page information that is the image data, or create and enlarge for displaying the page information in the vector data of a text or diagram.
  • the length of the current page tag should be set to several times the normal length.
  • the page information may have the article information expressly defined with the scope of coordinates for the article information in the page information.
  • the operation unit (input unit) 2 if the coordinate values indicated by the fingertip are contained within the scope of coordinates, the article information corresponding to the scope of coordinates is displayed on the display 1 .
  • the scope of coordinates for this article information becomes data which does not depend on the device, if it is defined in terms of the ratio of the article information relative to the length of the page information.
  • FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating a process example for displaying in enlargement the article information in the first example.
  • the page information display method of this example comprises an article information enlarging operation detecting step A 51 of outputting an article information enlarging operation detecting signal having the positional information as to an article information enlarging operation, when the article information enlarging operation is detected on the operation unit, in the case where plural articles of information making up a current page are defined in the current page read from the storage unit 4 that is to be displayed at present, and an article information enlarging display step A 52 of displaying in enlargement the article information at a position indicated by the positional information on the display unit, in the case where the article information enlarging operation detecting signal is output in the article information enlarging operation detecting step A 51 .
  • the article information enlarging operation detecting step A 51 further comprises a substep of outputting an article information enlarging operation detecting signal including a click position as the positional information, for example, when a click is made on the operation unit 1 C. That is, by clicking on the article information to be read, that article information can be enlarged.
  • the page information display method further comprises, following the article information enlarging display step A 52 , an article display page turning inhibit control step A 53 of inhibiting a normal page turning operation while the article information is being displayed in enlargement. If the page turning operation is enabled while the article information is displayed in enlargement, a linear structure of the page information in which the page number is incremented one by one is broken, and it is apprehended that the user is confused. That is, if the access is permitted by turning pages while the article information is being displayed, the page information gets rid of the linear information structure, because the information structure is branched at that time. As a result, it is difficult for the user to reconstruct the information structure easily. Therefore, in a preferred embodiment, the page turning process during the display of article is inhibited. Accordingly, all the operations that are performed during the display of article are interpreted as the operation of restoring the page information having that article information to the original state.
  • FIG. 44 is an explanatory view illustrating an example of effecting the continuous enlargement operation by dragging plural articles.
  • the article information enlarging operation detecting step A 51 further comprises an article information continuous enlarging operation detecting substep of outputting an article information continuous enlarging operation detecting signal in the case where two or more articles of information is contained in a locus of dragging, when a dragging is made on the operation unit.
  • the article information enlarging display step A 52 may comprise a continuous enlarging display substep of displaying in enlargement the article information individually in time series at every predetermined time interval in the order of the dragging, in the case where the article information continuous enlarging operation detecting signal is output.
  • the continuous enlarging display step may comprise a substep of displaying in enlargement the two or more articles of information in time series continuously at a time interval in accordance with a rate of the dragging, for example.
  • the page information (fourth page) having articles of information 82 A, 82 B, 82 C, 82 D is displayed as the current page.
  • this operation is judged as the article information continuous enlarging operation.
  • the continuous enlarging display step involves first displaying the article information as indicated by reference numeral 82 A, and after the elapse of a certain access time, or upon an article information reduction instruction (e.g., a click on the enlarged article information of the touch panel), displaying the next article information 82 B and then the article information 82 C.
  • an article information reduction instruction e.g., a click on the enlarged article information of the touch panel
  • FIG. 45 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of displaying in enlargement the article with a wire frame.
  • the article information enlarging display step A 52 comprises an enlarging time wire frame display substep of enabling a wire frame, with a start region at an outside periphery of the article information to be enlarged, to be displayed at multiple stages of varying sizes up to an outside periphery of the display unit.
  • the wire frame display is made, a wire frame as large as surrounding the article information is displayed.
  • a plurality of wire frames are created at the same aspect ratio for the outside periphery of this wire frame and the outside periphery of the information access area 5 .
  • the wire frames are displayed in succession from the wire frame surrounding the article information to the outside periphery of the information access area 5 .
  • the page information display method may further comprises, following the article information enlarging display step A 52 , a reducing time wire frame display step of enabling a wire frame, with a start region at an outside periphery of the display unit, to be displayed at multiple stages of varying sizes up to an outside peripheral position of the article information at the current page, when an enlargement completing operation for completing the enlargement of the article information is performed. Then, where the article information enlarged currently was located in the page information can be displayed excellently.
  • FIG. 46 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of enlarging the article information after embossing it.
  • the article information enlarging display step comprises a substep of embossing an article chosen from the current page.
  • FIG. 46A is a view illustrating a state in which an article is shaded for embossing
  • FIG. 46B is a view illustrating a state in which a selected article is being enlarged
  • FIG. 46C is a view illustrating a state after the enlargement process is completed.
  • an embossing process is implemented by applying the article information 84 with a shade 85 .
  • the reduced article data to be embossed may be superposed on the page information.
  • an embossed portion may be replaced with the article data, when the enlargement of the article is ended.
  • FIG. 47 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of a tag display when the article information is enlarged.
  • the article information enlarging display step A 52 comprises an enlarged tag appending step of enlarging a tag as well as appending the enlarged tag to the enlarged article information, in the case where the current page has the tag.
  • the appearance of the tag is changed. Thereby, the transfer of the access state by the access operation can be presented to the user.
  • a tag 8 A appendant to the page information containing that article information is enlarged.
  • the tag is displayed in enlargement along with the article information to clarify that the article information is being access in enlargement.
  • FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating one example of an article information table which lists in correspondence the page information and the article information.
  • a way of storing the article information may include enlarging part of the page information by having the page information of high resolution and referring to the range of coordinates for the article information. In this case, the presence or absence of the article information and the designation are defined in each page information, and the range of coordinates is determined for each article information, as shown in FIG. 48.
  • This article information table is stored in the storage unit 4 to enlarge the article information.
  • the tag display as shown in FIGS. 16 or 20 is through an interface which is not only superior in the respect of allowing the user to intuitively know the total page number of electronic information or the position of current page relative to the total page number of electronic information, but also favorable as a tool to allow the user to display a desired page from among a plurality of pages defined linearly.
  • an interface in which an operation of turning the page for a book is a metaphor, and using a tag which is considered to be an artificial presence, the operation can be intuitively understood, irrespective of the computer experiences.
  • a pointer driven interface is adopted.
  • the pointer may be a fingertip or a pen-type pointer, for the use of a touch panel display 49 , or a mouse 105 or an arrow operated by the arrow key of a keyboard 104 and displayed on the screed, for the use of a CRT connected to a computer 100 .
  • the touch panel is desirable.
  • One access means of switching promptly from one page being accessed to another page to access is a click of tag.
  • the sheets may be brushed at the side edge in turning the page for the book.
  • the similar operation is conducted by the click of tag.
  • the user directly touches the tag 8 , 9 , 10 of the page which the user wants to access, so that the page information corresponding to the tag content 18 such as page number of the designated tag 8 , 9 , 10 is displayed in the information access area 5 , as desired, while the behavior of turning the page is displayed visually.
  • the page with the tag appended may be turned.
  • One access means of turning the pages sporadically in a certain range of pages roughly involves touching the tag with a fingertip and keeping the fingertip away from the tag consecutively, while tracing with the fingertip plural tags appendant to the page information desired to read by turning the pages, so that each page information is displayed in the order of touching the tag in the information access area 5 , with a constant display interval and consecutively. Then, the timer 48 measures the time until plural tags have been touched. At a display rate proportional to the measuring time, the page information can be displayed in succession.
  • the sheets to be turned are turned over, with the side edge of the sheets pressed. In the same way, the tags are consecutively pointed down, to effect the turning of the pages in succession.
  • FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a process in the second example of the present invention.
  • a current page is displayed (step S 91 ).
  • Each tag is also displayed in the normal display mode or the semantic display mode (step S 92 of displaying the tag).
  • the procedure waits for a pointer event (step S 93 ). If there occurs a pointer event, a page turning operation is performed in accordance with the sort of event (step S 94 of controlling the even driven display).
  • FIG. 50 shows the relation between the pointer event and the page turning process.
  • a dragged page is moved gradually as shown in FIG. 26, and the next page of that tag is displayed (page turning step). Then, the page may be moved along with the tag appended.
  • a certain tag is clicked, a page indicated by the clicked tag is displayed. If there is a difference between the pointer down position and the pointer up position within the same tag, that difference being above a predetermined threshold in the page turning direction, the next page of that tag may be displayed.
  • the access operation manager 45 may be provided with an event driven display controller.
  • Each operation as shown in FIG. 50 can be also implemented by the CPU which executes the program.
  • a method for each pointer event may rely on the use of a program which defines each operation.
  • the process of holding plural pages is common on the tag and the page information.
  • the process of turning the page by dragging in the direction of turning the page is a pointer event for the page information.
  • the operation for the page information may involve clicking on the article information or dragging plural articles.
  • FIG. 51 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of a process for selecting one of the page turning and the continuous display of article information in a locus of dragging.
  • an event driven display control portion comprises a page selection function for each locus direction for selecting a page having a smaller page number or a larger page number than that of a page being displayed at present on the basis of the locus of pointer from the pointer down to up.
  • the event driven display control portion may have an article continuous display function of continuously displaying in enlargement the article information overlapped on a path of the locus on the basis of the path of the locus.
  • FIG. 51A is a view illustrating the locus on the straight line
  • FIG. 51B is a view illustrating the locus having a curve.
  • the page turning process is determined for a locus 86 of the straight line extending beyond a predetermined area R.
  • the selection of the article information is determined, as shown in FIG. 51B.
  • the tag is designated, or an operation is performed on the page information in this example, whereby it is possible to access the electronic information at any page by changing the display rapidly from the page being accessed to the electronic information at that page.
  • the user can switch the page information in an easy manner.
  • a process of prefetching the page information will be disclosed below.
  • the page information may be read sequentially one page after another with high possibility. Therefore, it is conceived that plural pages following the current page are prefetched and stored in a VRAM (primary storage) 46 or a cache memory (secondary storage) 27 .
  • VRAM primary storage
  • secondary storage secondary storage
  • FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating an operation of this example.
  • a current page A is displayed (step A 56 ).
  • a page turning operation is identified (step A 57 ).
  • the pressure is measured (step A 59 ), and the number of pages corresponding to the pressure is calculated (step S 60 ).
  • a next page C to be displayed at the next time is determined if the turning operation is made at this time (step A 61 ).
  • step A 62 it is checked to see whether or not there is a sufficient capacity to secure the page C in the VRAM. IF there is less sufficient capacity in the VRAM, the page B which has resided in the VRAM for the longest time is abrogated (step A 63 ). At this time, the page number Bn of the abrogated page B is memorized. On the other hand, if the VRAM has a sufficient capacity to memorize the page C, the page C is stored in the VRAM (step A 64 ).
  • step A 67 If the page turning operation is actually performed, the page C is set to the current page (step A 67 ), and the following step is performed (step A 68 ). On the other hand, if there is no page turning operation, turning plural pages has been cancelled, whereby the page C is deleted from the VRAM, and the page B is stored again in the VRAM (step A 65 )
  • FIG. 53 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of a state of turning plural pages collectively.
  • the display controller 3 comprises a cache memory (secondary storage) 47 for memorizing temporarily the page information that is judged to be displayed on the touch panel among the electronic information stored in the electronic information memory 4 , a continuous page prefetch control portion 3 B for storing in advance the page information having a page number following the page number of the current page being displayed at present on the touch panel in the cache memory, and a page turning process control portion 62 for effecting a page turning process by selecting one or more pages in accordance with an operation on the touch panel 1 .
  • a cache memory (secondary storage) 47 for memorizing temporarily the page information that is judged to be displayed on the touch panel among the electronic information stored in the electronic information memory 4
  • a continuous page prefetch control portion 3 B for storing in advance the page information having a page number following the page number of the current page being displayed at present on the touch panel in the cache memory
  • a page turning process control portion 62 for effect
  • the continuous page prefetch control portion 3 B has a plural pages-turning time deleting function 3 D of deleting the page data in the plural pages from the cache memory 47 , in the case where a page turning operation of plural pages is detected by the page turning process control portion 62 .
  • the continuous prefetch control portion 3 B prefetches plural pages following the current page from the storage unit 4 and stores them in the secondary storage 47 .
  • the plural pages turning time deleting function 3 D is to delete the page data in plural pages from the cache memory 47 , if the operation of turning plural pages is detected by the page turning process control portion 62 .
  • the data skipped by turning plural pages is deleted from the cache memory 47 to make effective use of the capacity of the cache memory.
  • the display controller 3 may comprise an article information prefetch control portion for storing the article information within the current page in the cache memory if the current page contains the article information.
  • FIG. 54 is an explanatory view illustrating an example for memorizing the page information of high resolution. In the example as shown in FIG. 54, the individual article data is produced from the data of one page. In this example, the article information prefetch control portion creates beforehand the article information while the current page is being displayed, and stores it in the cache memory or VRAM.
  • FIG. 55 is an explanatory view illustrating an example of memorizing the page information and the article information separately. In this case, the article information prefetch control portion reads the individual article information from the storage unit 4 , and stores it in the VRAM 46 .
  • a method of creating the page information accessible by the page information display device from the electronic information 1 A stored in the storage unit 4 will be specifically described below.
  • the above page information display device has a capability of access in a universal file format widely used for the electronic information, such as a text format, an image format, an HTML format, an XML format, or a PDF format. Therefore, when the linear information structure of access information is defined, it is desirable that each file format has an information structure in view of the information in a unit of page such as a book.
  • the specific information structure of each file format it is presumed that its specific structure can be recognized by the page information display device. The reason is that the page information display device is not intended to analyze the specific structure to each file format as its main purpose, and it is generally considered that the information structure can be easily analyzed from the file format as the conventional art.
  • the universal file formats widely used as the electronic information can be classified into four categories, depending on the information structure.
  • a first category is typically a text format of information structure.
  • the feature is that the length of one line of sentence, or the size or kind of font, is not defined, and the number of lines is not defined like a rolled book having no unit of page. Therefore, to gain access in a unit of page on the page information display device, the size or kind of font is first defined to determine the amount of information contained in one page. Consequently, the page screen image can be determined, and stored in the storage unit as the access information, which can be accessed on the page information display device.
  • a second category is an image format of information, such as a bit map format, a TIFF format, a PICT format, a JPEG format, or a GIF format.
  • the page information display device creates the access information having the image size translated so that the image format of information may be fully contained in the access area. Then, the information of the image format is divided by the size of the information access area to create the article information. And the access information and the article information are registered in the page table to enable access with the page information display device.
  • a third category is typically an HTML format or an XML format of information structure.
  • HTML format or an XML format of information structure.
  • it is necessary to create a page table corresponding to a hyperlink structure and a frame (means for displaying the electronic information in respective areas of divided display screen).
  • a conversion method of the hyperlink structure in the page information display device will be described below.
  • the hyperlink structure allows the file on the Internet to be set at the link destination. Therefore, for all the information of HTML format or XML format, it is of no use to define the linear information structure by automatically looping the link destination, because the number of pages is increased without limit.
  • the page information display device creates the access information only for the electronic information present within the same domain of electronic information to translate the information in the HTML format or XML format into the linear information structure. If the link destination is outside the same domain, the electronic information is ignored in the process of creating the linear information structure.
  • a fourth category is a PDF format (manufactured by Adobe: a file format accessible by AcrobatReader) of information structure. Since the electronic information of the PDF format is in a unit of page, the page information display device makes direct use of the electronic information of the PDF format in the given page order. The access information is created by transforming the image information of each page in the electronic information of the PDF format into the size which can be displayed in the access area. When the electronic information of the PDF format has the link structure, the link is ignored to secure the linear information structure, thereby making it possible to gain access to the information structure of the PDF format.
  • the data in any of various formats is once transformed into the image data.
  • the third party is not allowed to easily alter the content, and the electronic papermark can be readily embedded into the access information according to the conventional art.
  • the access information can be readily applied on the surface of a virtual object as the texture information.
  • FIG. 56 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the page information processing unit that converts the ML data in the fourth example of the invention.
  • a page information display device comprises reception means 93 for receiving the ML data described in a make-up language via a communication line from a server, ML data conversion means 94 for converting the ML data received by the reception means 93 into the image data in a unit of page of predetermined size, an electronic information memory 4 for memorizing the page information that is the image data converted by the ML data conversion means 94 , a touch panel 1 for displaying the page information stored in this electronic information memory 4 as well as inputting an operation to gain access to the page information, and a display controller 3 for controlling the display of the page information stored in the electronic information memory on the basis of an operation content input into the touch panel 1 .
  • the ML data conversion means 94 comprises a page number appending portion 95 for converting a link structure of the ML data into one dimensional book structure as well as appending sequentially the page number to the page information after conversion.
  • the display controller 3 comprises an event driven display control portion 97 for selecting the page information of a page having a smaller page number or a larger page number than that of a page being displayed at present on the touch panel as a next page to be displayed at the next time on the basis of a locus from the pointer down to up on the touch panel.
  • FIG. 57 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of the link structure of an ML page, wherein FIG. 57A is a view illustrating one example of the link structure, and FIG. 57B is a view illustrating an example in which the link structure is transformed into the book structure.
  • the pages N 2 to N 7 are defined in three hierarchies C 1 , C 2 and C 3 from a home page N 1 that is a route, these pages can not be directly treated as the page information in this embodiment.
  • the ML data within its domain is downloaded, and then converted into the book structure.
  • the page number appending portion 95 converts the link structure of the ML data into the one-dimensional book structure and appends sequentially the page number to the page information after conversion.
  • the ML data converting means 94 converts the ML data of the structure as shown in FIG. 57 into the image data in the unit of page of predetermined size.
  • This page number appending portion 95 converts the ML data into the book structure having the linear structure. Because each page is appended with the page number, the operation of turning one page, appending the tag, or holding plural pages is enabled.
  • a link structure 200 as shown in FIG. 57A is translated into the structure as shown in FIG. 57B.
  • the ML pages N 2 , N 3 , N 4 linked under the ML page N 1 are arranged in the order of link.
  • the ML pages N 5 , N 6 , N 7 linked under ML the pages N 2 , N 3 are arranged in the order of link under the ML information N 2 , N 3 to be linked.
  • the ML data conversion means may comprise a tree structure converting portion 96 for designating a single tree structure from the link structure 200 of the ML data as well as converting the tree into a one-dimensional book structure by searching the tree in a predetermined search order.
  • This tree structure converting portion 96 searches the link structure of the ML data, giving priority to the depth in the example as shown in FIG. 57. Also, it may search the link structure, giving priority to the width. In the case where the depth is given priority, the preorder scan may be effected outputting from the side closer to the route of tree.
  • FIG. 58 is an explanatory view illustrating another example of the link structure of the ML page.
  • a link L 37 with the ML information N 3 having a smaller page number at the hierarchy C 2 is made effective, and a link L 47 with the page information N 4 is ignored.
  • the link L 23 , L 67 exists at the same hierarchy C 2 , C 3 as shown in FIG. 59, these links are all ignored.
  • the file of HTML format with a frame defined is the page information, the frame which is a heading for other pages is placed at the upper hierarchy, and the above process is performed.
  • the display controller 3 comprises a tag appending portion 98 for appending a tag indicating a page number of the page information to both end portions of the touch panel 1 , the tag appending portion having a converted page tag display function of displaying the tag for the page having the page number appended by the page number appending portion on the touch panel. Then, the position and amount of page information accessible after conversion can be clear.
  • the information provided via the Internet can be accessed with a simple operation.
  • FIG. 60 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a page information display device for controlling the tag display at the time of streaming in a fifth example of the invention.
  • the page information display device comprises reception means 93 for receiving the page information via a network 91 from a server 90 , an electronic information memory 4 for memorizing the page information being received by this reception means 93 , a touch panel 1 for displaying the page information stored in the electronic information memory 4 as well as inputting an operation to gain access to the page information, and a display controller 3 for controlling the display of the page information stored in the electronic information memory on the basis of an operation content input into the touch panel 1 .
  • the display controller 3 comprises a tag appending portion 98 for displaying a tag indicating the content of the page information stored in the electronic information memory on the touch panel, and a streaming time dynamic tag appending control portion 99 A for operating the tag appending portion as the page information is being received by the reception means. Since the tag appending control portion 99 A appends the tag to the page information downloaded, the user can grasp to which page the page information has been downloaded while perusing the current page.
  • the display controller 3 may comprise a streaming time dynamic tag coloring control portion 99 B for coloring a tag which has been received with a different color from the tags which have not been received, as the page information is being received by the reception means 93 , and a streaming time dynamic tag length control portion 99 C for enabling the tag appending portion to create a tag having a length corresponding to the amount of information already received in one page of the page information as the page information is being received by the reception means 93 .
  • FIG. 61 is a view illustrating an example of controlling the tag display in accordance with the amount of downloaded data in the configuration as shown in FIG. 60, wherein FIG. 61A is a view illustrating an example of displaying the tag for the page which has been completely downloaded, and FIG. 61B is a view illustrating an example of setting the tag for the page being downloaded to the tag length in accordance with the downloaded volume.
  • the operation is controlled such that in the portion where the display page is not preserved locally, the tag is not displayed. The user is notified that the page can not be accessed by displaying no tag.
  • the pages up to the sixth page have been downloaded.
  • the length of tag is shortened. To indicate that the enlarging operation is not allowed, the data being downloaded may be interlace displayed.
  • FIG. 62 is a view illustrating an example of controlling the tag display in accordance with the amount of downloaded data in all pages in the configuration as shown in FIG. 60, wherein FIG. 62A is a view illustrating an example of normally displaying the page tag only, and FIG. 62B is a view illustrating an example of normally displaying the page tag by the length of tag in accordance with the volume of one page that has been downloaded.
  • the page tag is displayed 70% in color like a bar graph, whereby a downloaded state of the data by streaming is visualized.
  • the streaming technique is employed by providing the restriction that the page not downloaded (0%) can not be accessed.
  • the seventh page is being downloaded. Since the seventh page has been downloaded by 70%, it is indicated that the bottom side of the page tag (shaped like a trapezoid) is displayed by 70%. Namely, the size of page tag is changed in accordance with the downloaded volume so as to visualize the downloaded volume by streaming clearly.
  • the data conversion may be made into the predetermined data format in the same way as in the fourth example.
  • the display of tag may be made depending on whether the page data is converted or not.
  • FIG. 63 is an explanatory view illustrating an example of handling the history information in the sixth example of the invention, wherein FIG. 63A is a view illustrating one example of the history information in which the commands for limited operations are memorized, and FIG. 63B is a view illustrating one example of the history information in which the commands for all operations are memorized.
  • the operation history is described in the history information.
  • the operation history memorized serves as a supplementary function when the drawing method of the system can not be followed, a complex page turning operation (e.g., a direct page turning operation or a continuous page turning operation) wherein the operation and the drawing can not be synchronized well, and an operation (e.g., enlargement or reduction) that is not performed before the drawing is completed may not be described in the history information to avoid the divergence of the operation.
  • a complex page turning operation e.g., a direct page turning operation or a continuous page turning operation
  • an operation e.g., enlargement or reduction
  • FIG. 64 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing an operation thread and a drawing thread independently. At step A 75 , the operation and the drawing are connected.
  • a special display of touch panel type as shown in FIG. 15 is not used, but the computer as shown in FIG. 65 is used to gain access to the page information.
  • a computer 100 is a machine having a display unit 102 and a main unit 103 .
  • the user layer who can operate an electronic oven but is not good at reservations of the video program may have an impression of difficulties of operation.
  • the operation by a keyboard 104 or a mouse 105 is troublesome in the respect of simply accessing the information, as compared with the device as shown in FIG. 15.
  • the operation method specific to the conventional graphical user interface as described herein is to operate a virtual input device which is abstractly displayed on the output unit of the computer, using an input cursor which can be operated by the mouse.
  • the virtual input device means, for example, a scroll bar 303 , a pop-up menu 304 , and pages 301 , 302 or the like of thumbnail representation displayed on the output unit of the computer as shown in FIG. 66.
  • the electronic information of one page is displayed on the same screen, including the next page, depending on the size of the display and the amount of electronic information. This is moved by using the scroll bar 303 , or the page is moved by using the thumbnail.
  • the scroll bar is artificial and never used in the practical access of books, it is necessary to become skillful in operating appropriately the direction or size.
  • the present invention makes use of the tag.
  • the tag When the tag is appended to the page of information side by side, most users may recall the label attached to the book. Therefore, it is sufficiently expected that the user is informed to use the tag when the user wants to move the page without any teaching.
  • the total amount of page information can not be known intuitively, depending on the state of the scroll bar.
  • the total amount of page information can be grasped at a glance owing to the tags appended to all the pages.
  • the position of the current page relative to the total pages can be considerably made clearer than the conventional example as shown in FIG. 66.
  • the conventional tag for use with the paper or computer has a heading for plainly representing the content of information described in the page.
  • This heading is plainly symbolic of the information extending over plural pages in most cases. Taking a quick look at the tags with the heading, it is not possible to know easily the heading designates the information from what page to what page. Since the heading information is typically composed of words or phrases, the heading information having too great number of characters is difficult to be attached to the tag. In such a case of attaching the heading to the tag with difficulty, the character size of the heading is reduced, or the characters to be written out of the tag are omitted. However, it is considered that the tag to be displayed in this situation does not exactly fulfill duties for the graphical user interface. On the other hand, in the examples of the present invention, since the page number is adopted as the tag content, the page position can be known in small size at a glance. Since the numbers are common throughout the world nations, the interface is consistent without regard to the language.
  • a sheet with tag for use in the spread sheet software is one of the interfaces in which the order of tags is not clearly defined. For instance, if a sheet 1 is opened, the arrangement of sheets is drawn in the order of the sheet 1 indicated by reference numeral 311 , a sheet 2 indicated by reference numeral 312 , and a sheet 3 indicated by reference numeral 313 , as shown in FIG. 67A. However, if the sheet 2 is opened, it is possible to construe the arrangement of sheets in the order of sheet 2 , sheet 1 , and sheet 3 (or the order of sheet 2 , sheet 3 and sheet 1 ), supposing that the physical sheets of paper are stacked, as shown in FIG. 67B. Only for the reason that the sheets are arranged in the order from the right, there is no gainsaying that the order of sheets is not changed, because it is unnatural visually. Some user layers may feel the interface to lack consistency and be irksome.
  • the conventional tag does not present a linear information structure (information structure having visually fixed order of sheet 1 , sheet 2 and sheet 3 in this example) in accordance with the order of pages such as a book. Therefore, the user may be visually confused with respect to the order of electronic information. It is troublesome, particularly for the purposes of easily gaining access to the information, that the recognition of such information structure may sometimes confuse the user.
  • the present invention is configured and functions as described above and can provide a page information display method superior to the conventional display method in that when a dragging is made in a direction parallel or anti-parallel to the page turning direction, an operation of turning one page is effected in accordance with the dragging direction, and the pages of electronic information can be turned with the same operation as the movement of a user's hand when the actual pages of paper are turned, whereby the user unfamiliar with the computer can intuitively master the operations required to gain access to the electronic information, and the readers of the electronic information can be extended over the wide classes of society beyond the computer users.

Abstract

To provide a user interface for gaining access to information which is user friendly, without regard to an experience of using a computer. There are included a page turning operation detecting step A1 of outputting a page turning operation detecting signal when a dragging is made on an operation unit in parallel or anti-parallel to a predefined page turning direction at a current page read from a storage unit 4 that is to be displayed at present, a next display page setting step A2 of setting a preceding page or a succeeding page immediately before or after a current page depending on a direction of a dragging operation to a next display page to be displayed at the next time, when a page turning operation detecting signal is detected in the page turning operation detecting step A1, and a page turning process step A3 of displaying the next display page set in the next display page setting step in place of the current page on a display unit 1.

Description

    BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • 1. Field of the Invention [0001]
  • The present invention relates to a page information display method and device, and in particular to a page information display method and device for displaying electronic information in a unit of page of predetermined size. [0002]
  • 2. Description of the Prior Art [0003]
  • Conventionally, the information required for the work, study or life is provided from the origins of information to the reader, using media such as books, or periodical publications, e.g., newspaper or magazines or the like. Also, the administrative or judicial information is provided in publications or documents. [0004]
  • In recent years, the Internet (Inter Network) by a TCP/IP has been well prepared to enable computers for the government, company, college, and individual to be interconnected directly or via a telephone network. With the development of providing the information via the Internet, a variety of information is created as an ML page (e.g., HTML page or XML page) created on the basis of a makeup language, which allows this page (typically referred to as a home page) to be accessed by using a computer. To provide the ML page, a large amount of documents are created in a PDF format, and can be downloaded from respective home pages. Just as a patent gazette is provided in CD-ROM, the important information may be publicized or circulated in the computer readable medium other than the Internet. [0005]
  • The information provided in a format accessible using a computer may include information contents from a wide variety of information sources covering data sheets of products manufactured by the company, the information of new products, documents created by the administration, pieces of legislation in making, the Supreme Court gists, research results of the college laboratory, detailed information of lodgings in a certain region, news, weather forecasts, for example. These may be duplicately provided in other paper media such as newspaper columns, magazines, or catalogues, but simply provided through the Internet or in the computer readable medium. Most of the past information may be often difficult to obtain substantially in paper media. [0006]
  • As the information infrastructures such as the Internet are prepared throughout the world in the future, more informatization will penetrate into the society increasingly. Thereby, it is apprehended that there occurs a personal difference in the amount or quality of necessary information between the user familiar with the computer and the user unfamiliar with the computer. [0007]
  • Means for operating the computer may be a graphical user interface (GUI, hereinafter referred to as a desktop metaphor) useful in most cases, which is metaphoric to the working environment of desk in the actual world. Through the user interface in the desktop metaphor, the working environment of desk is comically drawn to allow a file structure specific to the computer which is nonobjective and uneasy to understand to correspond with something present in the working environment of desk such as a file or folder. Thus, the computer beginners can operate the computer intuitively. For example, to delete a file, the file indicated by an icon which is metaphoric to paper is dragged and dropped into a garbage box. [0008]
  • However, through use of the user interface of desktop metaphor, many people in the world may think that the simple operation of gaining access to the electronic information in the computer is difficult. That is, through the user interface of desktop metaphor, it is required to make access to the electronic information by instructing or operating indirectly a virtual device such as buttons drawn on the display of computer, a pop-up menu, or a slide bar, using an input device such as a mouse or keyboard peculiar to the computer. [0009]
  • BRIEF SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • Object of the Invention [0010]
  • In the conventional examples as described above, there was a drawback that the access of information through the use of a computer was difficult. The operation scheme specific to the computer may take considerable time to master the operation. Thus, everyone can not easily make use of electronic information provided by the computer. Accordingly, there is a personal difference in the quality and amount of information available between the users. If many people feel it difficult to use the computer, the information provider abolishes the paper media for the information necessary to be conveyed and cannot entirely transfer to the electronic information. [0011]
  • For example, it was reported that when a large company introduced a computer system to do all business contacts and settlements of accounts by abolishing the paper media, the preparatory period was set to two years, and one year or more was dedicated to an education period for new staff members to get accustomed to the computer, so that the company fully succeeded in computerization. Some colleges provide computer literacy courses to educate the basic usage of computer. Generally, in the study and training of new staff members in the companies or government offices, the computer operation is educated. They are taught about not only access of the information, but also input and origination of the information. However, for the people who never have used the computer at all, it is a difficult work to simply access the information. [0012]
  • Therefore, it is desirable to provide a user interface which is intuitive and easy to operate, rather than a desktop metaphor. Particularly, an information access device which has a simple appearance and enables the operation intended to access the electronic information is promising. [0013]
  • To cope with such a problem, a prior access device which is an improved desktop metaphor was disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 5-165595. This realizes the appearance of a book on the display unit, and relies on a method of visualizing the electronic information on the display unit by outputting the overlapped pages composed of a plurality of sentences dislocated slightly to the display unit. A heading symbolizing a set of sentences is appended with the content of sentences as a unit of set to improve the desktop metaphor. However, in this conventional example, the amount of information to be displayed increases in proportion to an increase in the number of pages. Therefore, it is often difficult to secure the display area sufficiently. Consequently, there is a problem that the access area is reduced to make the access difficult. [0014]
  • A CRT or a liquid crystal display is becoming higher in resolution year after year. For example, if the resolution of about 150 dpi in A4 size is realized, it is possible to access the whole one face of newspaper in A4 size. That is, if the display has substantially a resolution of facsimile class, the newspaper or magazine is made readable in a size which is smaller than the actual size. In such a high-resolution display, the display of 1200×1600 dots can be made in A4 actual size. Therefore, the physical size becomes too small to be useful for the icon in the conventional operating system, giving an impression of something intricate to the user, possibly resulting in a user interface which is rather uneasy to understand. [0015]
  • Therefore, the development of a user interface in the next generation which can be intuitively used by the computer beginners as well is required. Then, it is desired to adopt a high-resolution display without changing the operation. In other words, it is desired to develop the user interface which is easy to master the operation and not dependent on the resolution. [0016]
  • Object of the Invention [0017]
  • It is an object of the present invention to resolve the inconveniences associated with the conventional example, and to provide a user interface for enabling access to the information which is easily understood by all people, irrespective of the computer experiences. [0018]
  • Summary of the Invention [0019]
  • Therefore, the present invention adopts a user interface having a metaphor like a book, newspaper or magazine. To realize the metaphor of this book, the electronic information is allowed to access in a unit of page of predetermined size. That is, the electronic information is displayed in a unit of page of predetermined size in an information access area of a display unit. And there is only a single information access area and the page can not be turned physically, unlike books. But a user interface which is metaphoric to the operation of turning over pages enables the information access area to be effectively used. This invention has a new feature in the user interface metaphoric to the operation of turning over pages, as will be detailed later. [0020]
  • Based on the above described analysis, and in order to accomplish the aforementioned object, the present invention provides a page information display method for displaying the electronic information using an information access device comprising a storage unit for storing the electronic information having plural pages of information in a unit of page of predetermined size, a display unit for displaying the electronic information stored in the storage unit in the unit of page, and an operation unit for inputting an operation to gain access to the page information, the operation unit being provided in the substantially same area as the display unit, and the method comprises: a page turning operation detecting step of outputting a page turning operation detecting signal when a dragging is made on the operation unit in parallel or anti-parallel to a predefined page turning direction at a current page read from the storage unit that is to be displayed at present; a next display page setting step of setting a preceding page or a succeeding page immediately before or after the current page depending on a direction of the dragging operation to a next display page to be displayed at the next time, when the page turning operation detecting signal is detected in the page turning operation detecting step; and a page turning process step of displaying the next display page set in the next display page setting step in place of the current page on the display unit. [0021]
  • The operation unit, which is provided in the substantially same area as the display unit, corresponds to a touch panel or a computer display, for example. When a dragging is made in a page turning direction on this operation unit, in other words, a dragging operation to press a mouse button and hold it down while moving the pointer in a page turning direction (or an opposite direction), and release the mouse button is performed, a page turning operation detecting signal is output in the page turning operation detecting step. In the next display page setting step, a preceding page or a succeeding page of the current page is set as a next display page, depending on a direction of dragging operation. If the next display page is set, the next display page is displayed in place of the current page on the display unit in the page turning process step. In this way, when a dragging operation is performed in parallel or anti-parallel to the page turning direction, a page turning process is effected one page by one page in accordance with the direction of that dragging operation. Therefore, it is possible to turn over pages of the electronic information with the same operation as the motion of the user's hand.[0022]
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • This above-mentioned and other objects, features and advantages of this invention will become more apparent by reference to the following detailed description of the invention taken in conjunction with the accompanying drawings, wherein: [0023]
  • FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating one example of a page information display method according to a first embodiment of the present invention; [0024]
  • FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating one example of a page information display device in the first embodiment as shown in FIG. 1, wherein FIG. 2A is a diagram showing an overall configuration, and FIG. 2B is a diagram showing a detailed configuration of a display controller; [0025]
  • FIG. 3 is an explanatory view illustrating an example of a page turning operation with the configuration as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2; [0026]
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a configuration of a page holding operation according to the second embodiment of the invention; [0027]
  • FIG. 5 is an explanatory view illustrating an example of displaying the number of holding pages with the configuration as shown in FIG. 4, wherein FIG. 5A is a view illustrating a pressure circle, FIG. 5B is a view illustrating a time circle, FIG. 5C is a view illustrating a pressure/time operation performed in a predetermined region, and FIG. 5D is a view illustrating an example of displaying the pressure circle in accordance with the operation as shown in FIG. 5C; [0028]
  • FIG. 6 is an explanatory view illustrating an operation example in the second embodiment as shown in FIG. 4, wherein FIG. 6A is a view illustrating a configuration of a page information display device, FIG. 6B is a view illustrating an example of displaying the pressure circle; [0029]
  • FIGS. 7A, 7B and [0030] 7C are explanatory views illustrating one example for displaying a multiloop with the configuration as shown in FIG. 4;
  • FIG. 8 is an explanatory view illustrating an example for displaying a coated circle with the configuration as shown in FIG. 4, wherein FIG. 8A is a view illustrating an example of the coated circle in a solid color, FIG. 8B is a view illustrating an example of the coated circle having transparency, and FIG. 8C is a view illustrating an example of the coated circle having gradation; [0031]
  • FIG. 9 is an explanatory view illustrating another example for displaying a coated circle with the configuration as shown in FIG. 4, wherein FIG. 9A is a view illustrating one example of the coated circle having a distortion, FIG. 9B is a view showing the reference causing the distortion, FIG. 9C is a view illustrating an example of distortion in the instance of a medium pressure, and FIG. 9D is a view illustrating an example of distortion in the instance of a large pressure; [0032]
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of selecting a display format according to a third embodiment of the invention; [0033]
  • FIG. 11 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a page information display device in the third embodiment; [0034]
  • FIG. 12 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of the display format at the time of turning a page with the configuration as shown in FIG. 10, wherein FIG. 12A is a view illustrating one example of the display format of an overwrite type, and FIG. 12B is a view illustrating one example of the display format of a slide type; [0035]
  • FIG. 13 is an explanatory view illustrating another example of the display format at the time of turning a page with the configuration as shown in FIG. 10, wherein FIG. 13A is a view illustrating one example of the display format of a compression type, and FIG. 13B is a view illustrating one example of the display format of a 3D type; [0036]
  • FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a configuration of a page information display method according to one embodiment of the invention; [0037]
  • FIG. 15 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a page information display device suitable for practicing each step as shown in FIG. 14; [0038]
  • FIG. 16 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of an initial state of a tag display in this embodiment; [0039]
  • FIG. 17 is an explanatory view illustrating a tag display example at the fourth page with the configuration as shown in FIG. 16; [0040]
  • FIG. 18 is an explanatory view for defining various technical terms for use in a fourth embodiment of the present invention; [0041]
  • FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the configuration of a semantic display process in which the tag length is changed continuously in the fourth embodiment of the present invention; [0042]
  • FIG. 20 is an explanatory view illustrating an example of a semantic display in the configuration as shown in FIG. 19; [0043]
  • FIG. 21 is a table showing one example of the page information display data for use in the fourth embodiment, in which FIG. 21A is a table illustrating an example where the minimum reference length is defined by the number of dots, and FIG. 21B is a table illustrating an example where the minimum reference length is defined by the physical length; [0044]
  • FIG. 22 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a page data display device in the fourth embodiment; [0045]
  • FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating one example of a process for determining the tag width and the tag length using the data of data structure as shown in FIG. 21; [0046]
  • FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating one example of a process for switching between a normal display and a semantic display; [0047]
  • FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process for displaying a tag again after turning a page; [0048]
  • FIG. 26 is an explanatory view illustrating a display example while turning a page with the configuration as shown; [0049]
  • FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating one example of a process for expanding the tag during the semantic display; [0050]
  • FIG. 28 is an explanatory view illustrating a display example with the tags near a pointer expanded in the process for expanding the tag as shown in FIG. 27; [0051]
  • FIG. 29 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of a page turning display format using a tag, wherein FIG. 29A is a view illustrating one example the display format of tag integral type, and FIG. 29B is a view illustrating one example of the display format of pages integral type; [0052]
  • FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating one example of a tag display control with a holding operation in the fourth embodiment; [0053]
  • FIG. 31 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of the tag display control as shown in FIG. 30; [0054]
  • FIG. 32 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of a tag coloring process under the tag display control as shown in FIG. 30; [0055]
  • FIG. 33 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of the tag coloring process in an opposite tag display area to that of FIG. 32; [0056]
  • FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating one example of the tag display in a process of turning plural pages collectively; [0057]
  • FIGS. 35A and 35B are explanatory views illustrating a tag display example in the process of turning plural pages collectively as shown in FIG. 34; [0058]
  • FIGS. 36A and 36B are explanatory views for highlighting the tag display in an information access area in the process of turning plural pages collectively as shown in FIG. 34; [0059]
  • FIG. 37 is an explanatory view illustrating a tag display example after completing the process of turning plural pages collectively; [0060]
  • FIG. 38 is an explanatory view illustrating an example in which a pressure circle is displayed over a tag, wherein FIG. 38A is a view illustrating an example of a left page tag, FIG. 38B is a view illustrating an example of a right page tag, and FIG. 38C is a view illustrating an example in which the tag coloring and the tag pressure circle are employed at the same time; [0061]
  • FIG. 39 is an explanatory view illustrating an example in which a holding object page is changed depending on an operation direction upon the tag, wherein FIG. 39A is a view illustrating one example of holding a previous page, and FIG. 39B is a view illustrating one example of holding a succeeding page; [0062]
  • FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing the configuration of this example; [0063]
  • FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the former part of a page information display process in the configuration as shown in FIG. 40; [0064]
  • FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the latter part of the page information display process continued from the process of FIG. 41; [0065]
  • FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating a process for displaying in enlargement the article information in a first example of this invention; [0066]
  • FIG. 44 is an explanatory view illustrating a continuous enlargement operation by dragging plural articles; [0067]
  • FIG. 45 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of an article enlargement display with wire frame, wherein FIG. 45A is a view illustrating a display example at the time of an enlargement process, and FIG. 45B is a view illustrating one example of the enlarged article information; [0068]
  • FIG. 46 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of a process of embossing and enlarging the article information, wherein FIG. 46A is a view illustrating a state in which an article is shaded for embossing, FIG. 46B is a view illustrating a state in which a selected article is being enlarged, and FIG. 46C is a view illustrating a state after the enlargement process is completed; [0069]
  • FIG. 47 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of a tag display when the article information is enlarged; [0070]
  • FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating one example of an article information table which lists in correspondence the page information and the article information; [0071]
  • FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating a process in a second example of the invention; [0072]
  • FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating the relation between a pointer event and a page turning in the process as shown in FIG. 49; [0073]
  • FIG. 51 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of a process for selecting one of the page turning and the continuous display of article information in a locus of dragging, wherein FIG. 51A is a view illustrating the locus on the straight line, and FIG. 51B is a view illustrating the locus having a curve; [0074]
  • FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a prefetch process in a third example of the invention; [0075]
  • FIG. 53 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of turning plural pages collectively; [0076]
  • FIG. 54 is an explanatory view illustrating an example in which the page information of high resolution is memorized; [0077]
  • FIG. 55 is an explanatory view illustrating an example in which the page information and the article information are memorized separately; [0078]
  • FIG. 56 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a page information processing unit that converts the ML data in a fourth example of the invention; [0079]
  • FIG. 57 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of the link structure of an ML page, wherein FIG. 57A is a view illustrating one example of the link structure, and FIG. 57B is a view illustrating an example in which the link structure is transformed into a book structure; [0080]
  • FIG. 58 is an explanatory view illustrating another example of the link structure of the ML page; [0081]
  • FIG. 59 is an explanatory view illustrating a further example of the link structure of the ML page; [0082]
  • FIG. 60 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a page information display device for controlling the tag display at the time of streaming in a fifth example of the invention; [0083]
  • FIG. 61 is a view illustrating an example of controlling the tag display in accordance with the amount of downloaded data in the configuration as shown in FIG. 60, wherein FIG. 61A is a view illustrating an example of displaying the tag for the page which has been completely downloaded, and FIG. 61B is a view illustrating an example of setting the tag for the page being downloaded to the tag length in accordance with the downloaded volume; [0084]
  • FIG. 62 is a view illustrating an example of controlling the tag display in accordance with the amount of downloaded data in all pages in the configuration as shown in FIG. 60, wherein FIG. 62A is a view illustrating an example of normally displaying the page tag only, and FIG. 62B is a view illustrating an example of normally displaying the page tag by the length of tag in accordance with the volume of one page that has been downloaded; [0085]
  • FIG. 63 is an explanatory view illustrating an example of handling the history information in a sixth example of the invention, wherein FIG. 63A is a view illustrating one example of the history information in which the commands for limited operations are memorized, and FIG. 63B is a view illustrating one example of the history information in which the commands for all operations are memorized; [0086]
  • FIG. 64 is a flowchart illustrating a page information display control process using the history information; [0087]
  • FIG. 65 is a perspective view illustrating a computer that is employed in this example; [0088]
  • FIG. 66 is an explanatory view illustrating a conventional user interface; and [0089]
  • FIG. 67 show another conventional user interface, in which FIG. 67A is an explanatory view showing the state of selecting the [0090] sheet 1, and FIG. 67B is an explanatory view showing the state of selecting the sheet 2.
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS
  • The preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. A first embodiment involves a process of turning one page, a second embodiment involves a process of turning plural pages collectively, and a third embodiment involves the display format during the page turning process. A fourth embodiment involves associating an operation using a tag with an element in each of the above embodiments. The cases where the page information has plural pages of information, and the page information is downloaded from a server, will be described later by way of example. [0091]
  • First Embodiment [0092]
  • In the first embodiment, the intuitive operation is allowed to facilitate the access to the electronic information, and a page turning process is effected in accordance with an operation on an operation unit such as a touch panel. At this time, a page turning direction is determined depending on an operation direction. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating one example of a page information display method according to the first embodiment of the invention. The page information display method of this embodiment displays the electronic information using an information access device comprising a storage unit (electronic information memory) [0093] 4 for storing the electronic information having plural pages of information in a unit of page of predetermined size, a display unit 1 for displaying the electronic information stored in this storage unit in the unit of page, and an operation unit 1C for inputting an operation to gain access to the page information, the operation unit being provided in the substantially same area as the display unit. In an example of using a touch panel as the display unit 1, the display unit 1 and the operation unit 1C are integrated.
  • Referring to FIG. 1, the page information display method comprises a page turning operation detecting step A[0094] 1 of outputting a page turning operation detecting signal when a dragging is made on the operation unit in parallel or anti-parallel to a predefined page turning direction at a current page read from the storage unit 4 that is to be displayed at present, a next display page setting step A2 of setting a preceding page or a succeeding page immediately before or after the current page depending on a direction of the dragging operation to a next display page to be displayed at the next time, when the page turning operation detecting signal is detected in the page turning operation detecting step A1, and a page turning process step A3 of displaying the next display page set in the next display page setting step in place of the current page on the display unit 1.
  • The page turning operation detecting step A[0095] 1 further comprises a page turning operation judging substep of judging, as the page turning operation, an operation exceeding a minimum operation length in the page turning direction within a predefined allowance region in a direction orthogonal to the page turning direction. The next display page setting step sets a page number that is equal to the page number of the current page incremented or decremented by one, depending on the direction of dragging operation, to the next display page. And the page turning process step A3 performs the page turning process to make the next display page a new current page. That is, by dragging a pointer in the page turning direction on the operation unit 1C, the next page is displayed. In the case where the pointer is dragged in a direction anti-parallel to the page turning direction, the previous page is displayed. The pointer may be a pointing device of the mouse, or a fingertip of the user. In the case where the touch panel 1 is employed to perform the page turning operation, the page turning operation is allowed in a broader area than selecting the area where the tag is displayed.
  • The page turning process involves deleting the current page from the [0096] display unit 1, and displaying the next display page on the display unit 1. To present the state of turning a page to the user more intuitively by effecting this page turning process at stages, the current page may be gradually reduced, and the next display page may be displayed on the display unit at stages (refer to the third embodiment). Then, the page turning operation detecting step A4 may further comprise an operation rate calculating substep of calculating a page turning rate that is a speed of the page turning operation, and the page turning process step A3 may further comprise a display rate setting substep of setting a display rate corresponding to the page turning rate calculated in the operation rate calculating step to change the display from the current page to the next display page. Consequently, the relation between the page turning operation and the page turning process can be informed to the user more clearly.
  • FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating one example of a page information display device in the first embodiment as shown in FIG. 1, wherein FIG. 2A is a diagram showing the overall configuration, and FIG. 2B is a diagram showing the detailed configuration of a display controller. The page information display device of this embodiment has an [0097] electronic information memory 4 for memorizing the electronic information having plural pages of information in a unit of page of predetermined size, a touch panel 1 for displaying the electronic information stored in this electronic information memory 4 in the unit of page, as well as inputting an operation to gain access to the page information, and a display controller 3 for controlling the display of the page information stored in the electronic information memory 4 on the basis of an operation content input into this touch panel 1.
  • And the [0098] display controller 3 comprises a page turning operation detecting portion 60 for outputting a page turning operation detecting signal when a dragging is made on the touch panel 1 in parallel or anti-parallel to a predetermined page turning direction 34 at a current page read from the electronic information memory that is to be displayed at present, a next display page setting portion 61 for setting a preceding page or a succeeding page immediately before or after the current page depending on a direction of the dragging operation to a next display page to be displayed at the next time, when the page turning operation detecting signal is output by the page turning operation detecting portion 60, and a page turning process portion 62 for displaying the next display page set in the next display page setting portion 61 in place of the current page on the touch panel. The process of FIG. 1 can be implemented under the control of the display controller 3 having the above portions.
  • FIG. 3 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of the page turning operation with the configuration as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. As shown in FIG. 3, the page information having a one-dimensional structure (book structure) is accessed by turning pages sequentially, whereby the user unfamiliar with the computer operation can acquire the necessary information surely. [0099]
  • The process contents of FIGS. 1 and 2 can be realized by a page information display program that is executed under the control of the display controller. In this case, the page information display program has the commands corresponding to the configuration as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. Specifically, the page information display program comprises, as the commands for operating the [0100] display controller 3, a page turning operation detecting command for outputting a page turning operation detecting signal when a dragging is made on the touch panel in parallel or anti-parallel to a predetermined page turning direction at a current page read from the electronic information memory that is to be displayed at present, a next display page setting command for setting a preceding page or a succeeding page immediately before or after the current page depending on a direction of the dragging operation to a next display page to be displayed at the next time, when the page turning operation detecting signal is output, and a page turning process command for displaying the next display page set in accordance with the next display page setting command in place of the current page on the touch panel. If each of the commands is executed by the display controller 3, the configuration as shown in FIG. 2B is realized, so that the process of FIG. 1 is performed. When the page information display device has the function added or changed, a command corresponding to the function to be added or changed may be newly introduced.
  • This page information display program is stored in a [0101] storage medium 17 such as a CD-ROM, read by a disk drive 16 as shown in FIG. 2A, and stored in a hard disk, not shown. The page display program stored in the hard disk is employed by the display controller 3.
  • One example of judging the page turning operation or not is a judgment with the change and locus of operated coordinates. As shown in FIG. 2A, the xy coordinates are defined on the display unit (operation unit) [0102] 1, the amount of movement from an input coordinate (Px, Py) when the fingertip first touches at the operation unit 1C to an input coordinate (PX, PY) to which the fingertip is moved within a fixed time is measured. Herein, it is assumed that the amount of movement |PY−Py| in the Y axis direction is smaller than an arbitrary value (DY), and the amount of movement |PX−Px| in the X axis direction is larger than an arbitrary value (DX). That is, the operation in the page turning direction is beyond the arbitrary value (DX), while the amount of movement of pointer in a direction orthogonal to the page turning direction is below the arbitrary value (DY). And if a value of “PX−Px” is negative, the next display page setting portion 61 sets the page information of a succeeding page of the current page to the next display page. On the other hand, if the value of “PX−Px” is positive, it sets a preceding page of the current page to the next display page.
  • Accordingly, if the [0103] pointer 2A is moved to the right on the operation unit 1C in FIG. 2, for example, the page information displayed is turned from left to right, while the next page appears. Similarly, if the pointer 2A is moved to the left, the page information displayed is turned from right to left, while the preceding page gradually appears. In this way, an access method for accessing the page information by turning the pages one after another can be implemented in such a manner as to display the page information while visually presenting how the page is turned. That is, in this example, by detecting the movement direction of the pointer (input cursor) residing on the display unit 1 and the operation unit 1C, an intuitive access operation is enabled by simulating the operation of turning directly the page or chapter with a fingertip.
  • The operation with the tag or in the information access area may be performed by controlling the number of turning pages or the display rate in continuous display in accordance with the operation rate or pressure. In this way, it is possible to effect the display control in more intricate manner through the more intuitive operation. [0104]
  • Second Embodiment [0105]
  • In the second embodiment, a process of holding plural pages is introduced to improve the operability while maintaining the intuitive operation. FIG. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a configuration of the page holding process according to the second embodiment of the invention. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 4, the page information display method of the second embodiment comprises a page holding operation detecting step A[0106] 11 of outputting a page holding operation detecting signal when a predetermined page holding operation is made at a current page read from the electronic information memory 4 that is to be displayed at present, a holding page number displaying step A12 of displaying the total number of holding pages in accordance with the amount of the page holding operation on the display unit, when the page holding operation is initially detected in this page holding operation detecting step A11, a next display page setting step A13 of setting a page having a page number that is equal to the current page added or subtracted by the amount of the holding operation to a next display page to be displayed at the next time, when the page holding operation detecting signal is output in the page holding operation detecting step A11, and a page turning process step A14 of displaying the next display page set in this next display page setting step A13 in place of the current page on the display unit.
  • The page holding operation detecting step further comprises a pressure holding page number calculating substep of calculating the number of holding pages in accordance with the magnitude of a pressure applied to the substantially same position of the [0107] operation unit 1C, when the operation unit 1C is a pressure detecting type, for example. Also, the page holding amount operation detecting step may comprise a time holding page number calculating substep of calculating the number of holding pages in accordance with the elapsed time of a depressing operation that continues at the substantially same position of the operation unit 1C, instead of the pressure holding page calculating step. Accordingly, in this embodiment, an operation of turning plural pages continuously while grasping a book at the ends with a pressure to turn a few pages of the book is metaphorically simulated to realize a process of “holding” plural pages in accordance with a pressure applied on the display unit 1.
  • The page turning process step A[0108] 14 executes a process of turning pages by effecting a page turning operation of moving the fingertip left or right in a state of holding plural pages. If the user holds plural pages but releases hold of the touch panel without effecting the page turning operation, holding plural pages is canceled, and an original operation state is restored.
  • To indicate the number of holding pages, various forms of display may be adopted. The total number of holding pages grasped actually may be indicated in numerical value, but the state of holding pages may be indicated in some form. For example, FIG. 5 is an explanatory view illustrating a display example of the number of holding pages with the configuration as shown in FIG. 4, wherein FIG. 5A is a view illustrating a pressure circle, and FIG. 5B is a view illustrating a time circle. In the examples as shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B, the holding page number display step as shown in FIG. 4 comprises a substep of displaying the holding display circles [0109] 63, 64 defined with a radius of the size corresponding to the amount of holding pages on the display unit 1.
  • By displaying this holding [0110] display circle 63 on the display unit, the number of holding pages with an operation can be intuitively grasped. In the pressure circle as shown in FIG. 5A, the diameter of the circle around the fingertip is increased or decreased in accordance with the magnitude of pressure. The term “in accordance with the magnitude of pressure” not only means that the diameter of circle is proportional to the pressure, but also means that the diameter of circle is increased acceleratively in accordance with the pressure (the number of holding pages is increased). In the case where the operation of a plurality of turning pages with pressure is performed, the maximum diameter (<∞) is set in an initial file, because the number of holding pages may depend on the resolution of a pressure sensor. The radius of the pressure circle can be calculated in accordance with the following expression.
  • (Diameter of pressure circle)=(maximum diameter)×(current pressure value)/(resolution of pressure sensor) (Number of holding pages)=(diameter of pressure circle)/(differential threshold for user's pressure)
  • In order to implement a page turning operation with the finger, and a function of holding plural pages (hereinafter referred to as a plural pages turning operation) with the pressure or time, it is necessary that the system can readily discriminate a difference between the page turning operation and the plural pages turning operation. In this embodiment, to validate the plural pages turning operation, this difference can be discriminated as the fingertip is kept for a certain time while touching at the touch panel as shown in FIG. 5C. To clarify that the plural pages turning operation is effective, the pressure circle is displayed in reduction around the fingertip if the plural pages turning operation is validated, as shown in FIG. 5D. [0111]
  • When plural pages are turned with the time as shown in FIG. 5B, the number of holding pages is increased in accordance with the length of the elapsed time. The diameter of the time circle, unlike the pressure circle, may become infinite unless the maximum diameter is set. In other words, in the case where plural pages are held with the time, it is possible to hold as many turning pages as present. In the case of the pressure circle, the diameter can be set to be infinite, but because the pressure sensor has a limited resolution, the operation becomes very sensitive, if the diameter is set to be infinite. An algorithm for calculating the diameter of the time circle (corresponding to the pressure circle) is as follows.[0112]
  • (Diameter of time circle)=F (elapsed time)
  • (Number of holding pages)=(constant)×(diameter of time circle)
  • F (elapsed time) signifies a function having a variable of the elapsed time. Herein, this function is assumed to be increasing. [0113]
  • FIG. 6A is a view illustrating a configuration of a page information display device. As shown in FIG. 6A, in the page information display device of the second embodiment, the [0114] display controller 3 comprises a page holding operation detecting portion 64 for outputting a page holding operation detecting signal when a predetermined page holding operation is performed at a current page read from the electronic information memory 4 that is to be displayed at present, and a holding page number display unit 65 for displaying the total number of holding pages in accordance with the operation amount of the page holding operation on the display unit, when the page holding operation is initially detected by the page holding operation detecting portion. The other configuration is the same as the first embodiment of FIG. 2. The page holding operation detecting portion 64 detects the number of holding pages in accordance with the pressure or elapsed time applied on the operation unit 1C. And the holding page number display unit 65 displays this holding page number on the display unit 1.
  • In order to realize the [0115] display controller 3 as shown in FIG. 6, the page information display program comprises a page holding operation detecting command for outputting a page holding operation detecting signal when a predetermined page holding operation is performed at a current page read from the electronic information memory that is to be displayed at present, and a holding page number display command for displaying the total number of holding pages in accordance with the operation amount of the page holding operation on the display unit, when the page holding operation is initially detected upon the page holding operation detecting command.
  • In FIG. 6A, a [0116] pressure circle 63A is displayed on the display unit. The pressure circle 63A is only drawn with an outer contour, and the article under the circle can be read during the operation. On the other hand, the actual number of holding pages can not be displayed, but the number of holding pages can be approximately grasped in terms of the diameter in this example. Hence, multiple operations may be needed. On the contrary, in the example as shown in FIG. 6B, the number of holding pages is displayed in numerical value inside (or around the circumference of) the pressure circle. In the example as shown in FIG. 6B, four pages are being held, and if the page turning operation is performed in this state, a preceding or succeeding page by four pages before or after the current page is displayed, depending on a direction of the page turning operation.
  • FIG. 7 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of displaying a multiloop with the configuration as shown in FIG. 4. In the example as shown in FIG. 7, the holding page number displaying step A[0117] 12 comprises a substep of displaying a multiloop consisting of a number of circles around the same center and corresponding to the page holding amount. With this method of displaying the multiloop, the number of loops increases or decreases like a tree ring with the greater or smaller pressure. Therefore, the loop serves as a memory for holding pages. The number of holding pages is calculated readily by changing the color or the line thickness of loop at every five pages, for example. That is, as the rule of 5 cm or 10 cm has the graduation that is easy to read, the color or the line thickness of loop may be changed as a memory at every five pages. In the example as shown in FIG. 7B, there is a circle indicating the holding in an inner region, with a number of loops corresponding to the number of holding pages around its outer circumference. The multiloop 63C as shown in FIG. 7B indicates that two pages are being held, and the multiloop 63C as shown in FIG. 7C indicates that four pages are being held. Also, the circle indicating the holding may be omitted.
  • FIG. 8 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of displaying a coated circle with the configuration as shown in FIG. 4. In the example as shown in FIG. 8, the holding page number displaying step A[0118] 12 comprises a substep of displaying a coated circle defined with a radius of predetermined size, the circle being coated corresponding to the page holding amount. For the coated circle, various forms of coating may exist as shown in FIGS. 8 and 9. The coated circle desirably has its diameter varied corresponding to the holding page number in each form of coating, but the number of holding pages may be indicated according to the coating color or the extent of variation. In this case, the coated circle itself has its fixed diameter.
  • FIG. 8A is a view illustrating one example of the coated circle in a solid single color. In the coating of solid single color, the content of the page information at the current page can not be read, and hence, this solid coating in single color may be confused with the operation of enlarging part of the page information. FIG. 8B is a view illustrating one example of a coated circle having transparency. If the coated circle is translucent, the article under the coated circle can be read even during the operation of turning plural pages. [0119]
  • FIG. 8C is a view illustrating one example of a coated circle having gradation. This display method is suitable employed when the number of holding pages is detected using the pressure. This gradation makes it possible to display the limit of resolution or the current operation state clearly by making dense the color in the central portion in accordance with the magnitude of pressure. Even if the actual pressure distribution is not displayed, this effect can be obtained. That is, if the actual paper face is pressed strongly (i.e., turning more pages corresponds to an action of pressing on the paper face more strongly), the paper face is sunk physically. Therefore, the circle is gradated so that the color is dense (dark) in the central portion with the high pressure, and becomes lighter toward the outside. Thus, the operation state can be displayed excellently. If the coated circle with gradation is translucent, as shown in FIG. 8B, how the paper face is sunk with pressure can be represented. [0120]
  • FIG. 9 is an explanatory view illustrating another example of displaying a coated circle with the configuration as shown in FIG. 4. This display method represents a sense of how the paper face is sunk at the fingertip by deforming the paper face three-dimensionally in accordance with the pressure. In the example as shown in FIG. 9A, an outside loop of the coated circle is drawn with the line, but this outside loop can be omitted. The term “three-dimensionally” does not necessarily mean dealing the paper face as the three dimensional graphics, but is met if a sense of sinking can be represented. For example, the image data of a part of the current page drawn with the reference as shown in FIG. 9B may be mapped onto a framework as shown in FIG. 9C or [0121] 9D to represent the deformation caused by the medium pressure or large pressure.
  • Third Embodiment [0122]
  • In the third embodiment, the current page being turned and the next display page are displayed effectively to promote an understanding of the correspondence between the operation and process contents by displaying the reaction or process of an access device as a result of operation clearly. [0123]
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a process example of selecting a display format according to the third embodiment. Referring to FIG. 10, the page information display method comprises a page turning operation detecting step A[0124] 21 of outputting a page turning operation detecting signal having the number of holding pages and a page turning direction defined, when a page turning operation for turning one or more pages is performed in the operation unit, a next display page setting step A22 of setting a preceding page or a succeeding page by the number of holding pages before or after the current page depending on the page turning direction to a next display page to be displayed at the next time, when the page turning operation is completed in the page turning operation detecting step A21 and the page turning operation detecting signal is output, and a page turning process step of displaying the next display page set in the next display page setting step A22 in place of the current page on the display unit.
  • And the page turning process step comprises a next display page reading substep A[0125] 23 of reading the next display page from the storage unit, when the next display page is set, a turning state display data creating substep A24 of transforming the current page data making up the current page that is being displayed on the display unit at every unit display time, as well as creating the turning state display data into which the current page is transformed, when the page turning operation detecting signal is output, and a turning state display data overwriting step A25 of overwriting the turning state display data created in the turning state display data creating substep on the next display data read in the next display page reading substep at every unit display time until the turning state display data is exhausted.
  • In this embodiment, a behavior of the page being actually turned is visually displayed on the display unit in performing the page turning process, to promote an intuitive understanding that the current page is deleted from the [0126] display unit 1 and the next display page appears on the display unit 1. Also, if the page turning process is displayed excellently, it is easier to learn that the page turning operation performed by the user is correct. Herein, the page turning operation detecting step A21 detects either turning one page in the first embodiment or holding plural pages in the second embodiment. Turning one page can be also considered as the operation of holding one page. The next display page setting step A22 designates a next display page on the basis of the page turning direction and the number of holding pages detected in the page turning operation detecting step A21. The page turning process comprises displaying the next display page at stages, as well as deleting the current page at stages. Therefore, the transformed current page is overwritten on the next display page. There are various ways of transforming the current page.
  • FIG. 11 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the page information display device according to the third embodiment. Referring to FIG. 11, the page information display device comprises an [0127] electronic information memory 4 for memorizing the electronic information having plural pages of information in a unit of page of predetermined size, a touch panel 1 for displaying the electronic information stored in the electronic information memory 4 in the unit of page, as well as inputting an operation to gain access to the page information, and a display controller 3 for controlling the display of the page information stored in the electronic information memory on the basis of an operation content input into the touch panel 1.
  • And the [0128] display controller 3, like that of the first embodiment as shown in FIG. 2B, comprises a page turning operation detecting portion 60 for outputting a page turning operation detecting signal with the number of holding pages and a page turning direction defined, when a page turning operation for turning one or more pages is performed on the touch panel, a next display page setting portion 61 for setting a preceding page or a succeeding page by the number of holding pages before or after the current page depending on the page turning direction to a next display page to be displayed at the next time, when the page turning operation is completed in the page turning operation detecting portion 60 and the page turning operation detecting signal is output, and a page turning process portion 62 for displaying the next display page set in the next display page setting portion in place of the current page on the display unit.
  • This page turning [0129] process portion 62, as shown in FIG. 11, comprises a next display page reading function 68 of reading the next display page from the electronic information memory, when the next display page is set, a turning state display data creating function 69 of transforming the current page data making up the current page that is being displayed on the touch panel 1 at every unit display time as well as creating the turning state display data into which the current page is transformed, when the page turning operation detecting signal is output, and a turning state display data overwriting function 70 of overwriting the turning state display data created in the turning state display data creating function 69 on the next display page read in the next display page reading function 68 until the turning state display data is exhausted.
  • A page information display program for realizing the page turning process portion as shown in FIG. 11 comprises, as the page turning process commands, a next display page reading command for reading the next display page from the electronic information memory, when the next display page is set, a turning state display data creating command for transforming the current page data making up the current page that is being displayed on the display unit at every unit display time as well as creating the turning state display data into which the current page is transformed, when the page turning operation detecting signal is output, and a turning state display data overwriting command for overwriting the turning state display data created in accordance with the turning state display data creating command on the next display page read in accordance with the next display page reading command at every unit display time until the turning state display data is exhausted. [0130]
  • Referring to FIGS. 12 and 13, a form of transforming the current page (i.e., a display format of the page turning process) will be described below. In the examples as shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the page turning direction is leftward in the figure, and for the simplification of explanation, the page information has an alphabet or a triangle or circle over the entire surface. FIG. 12A is a view illustrating one example of the display format of overwriting type. In the example as shown in FIG. 12A, the turning state display data creating step A[0131] 24 further comprises an overwriting display control substep of deleting an area on the start point side in the page turning direction at every unit time. In the example as shown in FIG. 12A, the turning state display data 71A is produced by deleting a current page 71 from the right hand side in the figure at stages. By overwriting this turning state display data 71A on the next display data 72, the turning state is displayed. In this overwriting type, the next display data successively appears from the right hand side of the current page.
  • FIG. 12B is a view illustrating one example of the display format of slide type. In the example as shown in FIG. 12B, the turning state display data creating step A[0132] 24 comprises a slide display control substep of deleting an area on the end point side in the page turning direction at every unit time as well as shifting the current page data by the amount of deleted area in the page turning direction. In the example as shown in FIG. 12B, the left hand side of the current page data 71B is deleted in the figure, and the current page data is shifted by the amount of deleted area in the page turning direction. This shifted image data as the turning state display data 71C is overwritten on the next display page 72. In the example as shown in FIG. 12B, the current page is slid gradually in the page turning direction so that the next display page 72 appears.
  • FIG. 13A is a view illustrating one example of the display format of compression type. In the example as shown in FIG. 13A, the turning state display data creating step A[0133] 24 comprises a compression display control substep of reducing the display length in the page turning direction at every said unit time as well as compressing the current page data to the reduced display length in the page turning direction. In the example as shown in FIG. 13A, it is allegorized that the current page is lifted in a normal direction (z axis direction) of the display unit at the end (or left end in the figure) along the page turning direction. If the display area of the current page 71 is reduced and compressed in the page turning direction, the current page has a shape as indicated by reference sign 71D. Then if further compressed, the current page has a shape as indicated by reference sign 71E. If they are overwritten on the next display page 72, the current page has its shape changed sequentially from a state indicated by reference sign 73D to a state indicated by reference sign 73E. Defining θ in the xy plane as shown in FIG. 13A, the current page 71 is transformed so that the change rate (or angular velocity) of θ may be constant. Thereby, the behavior of how the page is turned can be represented dynamically.
  • FIG. 13B is a view illustrating one example of the display format of 3D type. In the example as shown in FIG. 13B, the turning state display data creating step A[0134] 24 comprises a three dimensional space defining substep of defining a virtual space in a normal direction of the display unit, a current page rotating substep of rotating the current page within the virtual space around the end point side in the page turning direction, and a three dimensional display control substep of drawing a front side and a back side of the current page rotated virtually in the current page rotating substep in a two dimensional plane as viewed in a normal direction of the display unit as well as setting the drawing data to the turning state display data. In the example as shown in FIG. 13B, the state of turning the paper in the three-dimensional space is displayed on a two-dimensional plane. As an example of rotating the current page, there is a shape as indicated by reference sign 71G in FIG. 13B. In this case, the backside of the current page is indicated by reference sign 71H. The current page is drawn in the two-dimensional plane, and superposed on the next display page 73F, resulting in a shape as indicated by reference sign 73G. In this embodiment, because the page information is not displayed on the back side of the page, the current page may be drawn in a state where the content of the current page is seen through the back side, or the content of the next display page is reflected on the back side of the current page.
  • Fourth Embodiment [0135]
  • In the fourth embodiment, for the purpose of an easy understanding of the relation between the operation content and the process content in order to enhance the operability with the tag, the tag is effectively used for the display of the operation state. That is, in the fourth embodiment, as a method of indicating the total number of pages and the position of the current page as well as enabling an operation of turning the pages intuitively, the tag is employed. Referring to FIGS. [0136] 14 to 28, the method of displaying the tag will be described below, and then the relation between holding plural pages and the tag, and the extended use of the tag in the third embodiment, will be described below.
  • FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a page information display process according to the fourth embodiment of the invention. FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a page information display device which is suitable for practicing this process. In this embodiment, a [0137] display unit 1 is provided with an information access area 5 for displaying the page information, as shown in FIG. 15. Further, one and other tag display areas 6, 7 are provided to the left and right, or upward and downward of this information access area 5. A tag of a page displayed in the information access area is displayed in a right-side tag display area. Beneath this current page tag, a tag for a succeeding page (succeeding page tag 9) having a page number greater than a current page is appended. And in a left-hand tag display area, a tag for a preceding page (preceding page tag 10) of the current page is appended. In an example of FIG. 15, the fourth page is displayed.
  • In the example as shown in FIG. 15, the page information display device comprises a storage unit (electronic information memory) [0138] 4 for storing the electronic information having a plurality of pages in a unit of page of predetermined size, a display unit (display) 1 having an information access area 5 for displaying the electronic information stored in the storage unit 4 in a unit of the page and a tag display area 6, 7 for displaying a tag indicating the content of the page, the tag display area being provided on both ends of the information access area 5, and a display controller 3 for displaying the page information read from the storage unit 4, with a tag appended, on the display unit. The display controller executes the process as shown in FIG. 14.
  • Referring to FIG. 14, the display controller first reads the electronic information of a page designated with page designation information (step S[0139] 1). Subsequently, the height of a current page tag is determined, on the basis of the page number of read current page (step S2, determining the current page tag height). Further, the color and shape of a tag indicating each page preceding and succeeding the current page are determined (step S3). At this step S3, the highlighting of current page tag, the tag color or color variation, and the tag shape variation are set.
  • Subsequently, the current page of current display object read from the storage unit is displayed in the information access area at step S[0140] 4. Further, the tag appendant to the current page is displayed in the one or other tag display area at step S5 (displaying the current page). And before or after displaying the current page, a tag 9 appendant to each page (fifth to seventh page) following the current page (fourth page in the example of FIG. 15) is displayed in one tag display area (S6, displaying the succeeding page tag). Also, before or after displaying the current page, a tag appendant to each page preceding the current page in page number is displayed in the other tag display area (S7, displaying the preceding page tag). In the example of FIG. 14, each tag has the tag content displayed, the tag content being a content of tag (step S8).. In the example as shown in FIG. 15, the page number is displayed as the tag content (displaying the page number). Other than the page number, a mark or character indicating the place of page may be used.
  • Referring to FIG. 15, the [0141] display controller 3 has a variety of functions to implement the process as shown in FIG. 14. Specifically, it comprises an electronic information display portion 11 for displaying the page information of a current page of current display object read from the storage unit 4 in the information access area 5, and a current page tag display portion 12 for displaying the current page tag in the one or other tag display area. The display controller 3 further comprises a succeeding tag display portion 13 for displaying a tag appendant to each page following the current page at a position forward of the height of the current page tag in the one tag display area, and a preceding page tag display portion 14 for displaying a tag appendant to each page preceding the current page in page number at a position rearward of the height of current page in the other tag display area. In a preferred embodiment, the display controller 3 comprises a tag display mode setting portion 15 for setting the mode of tag (shape and color). The current page tag display portion 12 may have a current page tag height calculating function of calculating the page height of current page, on the basis of the ratio of the page number of current page relative to the total page number of electronic information.
  • The [0142] display controller 4 comprises a CPU for executing a page information display program and a RAM which is a main memory of this CPU. The page information display program is stored in a storage medium such as a CD-ROM and carried to the page information display device. The display controller 4 controls a program reading portion 16 such as a CD-ROM drive to read a program and store it in the storage unit 4. If this page information display program is executed, all or part of the process as shown in FIG. 14 is performed.
  • This page information display program may comprise the commands for operating the [0143] display controller 4 including a current page display command for displaying a current page of current display object read from the storage unit 4 in the information access area 5 and displaying a tag appendant to the current page in the one or other tag display area 6, 7, a succeeding page tag display command for displaying a tag appendant to each page following the current page in the one tag display area, before or after displaying the current page, and a preceding page tag display command for displaying a tag appendant to each page preceding the page number of the current page in the other tag display area, before or after displaying the current page.
  • As shown in FIG. 15, the [0144] display 1 consists of the information access area 5 and the tag display areas 6, 7 provided on the both sides of the information access area 5. For example, the electronic information display portion 11 draws the access information stored in the storage unit 4 in the information access area 5 of the display 1. Further, the tag display mode setting portion 15 specifies the tag display mode in accordance with the preselected setting. Subsequently, each tag display portion 12, 13 and 14 draws one sheet with tags 8, 9, 10 indicating the tag contents 18 such as the page number appended in the tag display area 6, 7, having an appearance with a tag added sheet. The current page tag 8 appended to the current page displayed in the information access area 5 has desirably a specific appearance of color or shape with a highlighted font for the tag content 18 such as the page number, for example, to easily distinguish it from other tags 9, 10.
  • Each [0145] tag 8, 9, 10 is arranged in accordance with the tag content 18 such as the page number. To make the page arranging order of the page information clear, the absolute positional relation of information provided for the computer is clarified by drawing comically the overlapping condition of tags. For example, the tag 10 displayed in one tag display area 6 has a smaller page number than the page number of the current page. The tags are displayed in overlapping condition so that the tag having a greater page number is placed visually in front of the tag having a smaller page number. Further, the tag displayed in the other tag display area 7 has a greater page number than the page number of the current page. The tags are displayed in overlapping condition so that the tag having a greater page number is placed visually in the rear of the tag having a smaller page number.
  • As compared with the [0146] tag content 18 such as the page number of the tag 8, 9, 10 appended in the information access area 5, the tag having a greater tag content 18 such as page number is displayed in one tag display area 6, and the tag having a smaller page number is displayed in the other tag display area 7. Also, the tags 8, 9, 10 are displayed differently in appearance in accordance with the page number of tag, which is an effective drawing method for clarifying the relative positional relation of access information.
  • FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing an initial state of the tag display according to this embodiment of the invention. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram showing a tag display example in which the fourth page is displayed in the configuration as shown in FIG. 16. Herein, the [0147] display unit 1 has the information access area 5 and the tag display areas 6, 7. The electronic information 1A stored in the storage unit 4 is displayed in the information access area 5 by reconstructing, as the page information in a unit of page, the amount of information which can be displayed in the information access area 5. The page information is data in a unit of page of predetermined size.
  • The page information display device arranges the [0148] tags 8, 9, 10 in the order of the tag content 18 such as the page number, with each tag 8, 9, 10 appended to the extremity of each page marking the tag content 18 such as page number, to exhibit that the arrangement of page information has a linear information structure, so that the page information in a unit of page can be superposed in succession like a book.
  • In the example of FIG. 16, the total page number of electronic information is 7 pages. Seven tags having the length of the [0149] tag display area 7 divided by the page number 7 are displayed. In order to overlap the tags, as shown in FIG. 16, this tag length is equal to the length divided plus the overlapping length. Typically, for the tag 8 appendant to the current page, the height or position of tag in a tag display direction may be determined, on the basis of the ratio of the page number of current page to the total page number of electronic information, at a step S2 of determining the current page tag height as shown in FIG. 15.
  • In the example as shown in FIG. 16, the page number of the page with the tag appended is displayed as the tag content indicated within the tag at a step S[0150] 8 of displaying the page number. Accordingly, the number appended to the tag in FIG. 16 is the page number of electronic information. As shown in FIG. 16, even in the case where the page information is accessed using only one information access area 5, the tag having the page number is displayed in the tag display area, so that the user can see intuitively the total amount or depth of electronic information. And in the example of marking the tags 8, 9, 10 with the page number, unlike the tag having the heading information marked, there is no problem that the page number can not be fully written in the tags 8, 9, 10. Of course, if there is a sufficient space in the tag display area 6, 7, an icon or the like suggesting the content of character information or page information may be attached.
  • Before or after the step SB of displaying the page number, the [0151] current page tag 8 may be highlighted. In the example as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the bold character is used as the font of current page tag.
  • Referring to FIGS. 16 and 17, the overlapping of tags will be described below. Firstly, with respect to the [0152] current page tag 8, as shown in FIG. 16, the succeeding page tags 9 a to 9 f are lower level tags. The order is such that the tag is at lower level as the page leaves away from the current page. Accordingly, the current page tag 8 is at the uppermost level. And the tags 9 a, 9 b, . . . , 9 f are placed at lower level in the order of 9 a, 9 b, . . . , 9 f. The overlapping of tags is such that the lowermost tag 9 f is at the lowest level, and the tags are overlapped in the order of 9 e, 9 d, . . . , 9 a. Thus, the user can understand the structure from the current page to the seventh page at a glance. In a case where there is an operation of gaining access to the fourth page, the preceding page tags are transferred to the one tag display area 6 in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, rather than changing the overlapping relation only in the other tag display area 7. Thereby, the position of current page relative to the total page number of electronic information can be quickly and correctly informed to the user.
  • As shown in FIG. 17, among the preceding page tags [0153] 10, a tag 10 c indicating a previous page (third page) of the current page is at the uppermost level, and the tag having smaller page number is placed at the lower level. Thereby, the depth of electronic information can be represented. After all, the hierarchical relation is such that the current page is at the uppermost level, and the page is positioned at lower level as the absolute value of a difference between the page number of the page and the current page number increases. Therefore, at a step of defining the tag relation, the current page tag 8 or the page tag preceding or succeeding the current page is at the uppermost level, and the page is positioned at lower level as the absolute value of a difference between the current page and the page for appending the tag increases. And at a step of setting the overlapping, the upper level tag overlaps the lower level tag in the one or other tag display area in accordance with the hierarchy of the page defined at the step of defining the tag relation. To clarify the order of arranging the pages, the depth of page can be visualized on the tag display area 6, 7 by comically drawing the overlapping of tags. In this way, in this embodiment, the tag 8, 9, 10 indicating the tag content 18 such as the page number is appended to the page information, which is then displayed in the tag display area 6, 7. Using an input unit 2, the tag 8, 9, 10 can be directly designated. The page information corresponding to the tag content 18 such as the page number for the tag 8, 9, 10 is displayed in the information access area 5. Then, the display mode for the tag 8, 9, 10 appended to the page information is changed, thereby making it possible to easily grasp the amount of information or the information structure provided for the computer. This is because the comparison between the number of tags in one tag display area 6 and that in the other tag display area 7 is visually easily made as shown in FIG. 15.
  • Further, in this embodiment, it is also possible to detect an input operation for accessing the page information such as turning the page in the [0154] information access area 5. For example, using a pointing device for the input operation with a fingertip such as a touch panel over the tag display area 6, 7 for input, there is provided a user interface which enables an access operation to be performed intuitively with the gesture of turning the page.
  • In the example of effecting the process as shown in FIG. 14, an access area and an operation area are provided in the display area on an output device of the computer to enable the electronic information displayed in the information access area to be fully listed. Further, the amount of information which can be displayed in the information access area is appropriately drawn by appending the tag indicating the page number to the electronic information in a unit of page, with the overlapping of tags. Therefore, the user can easily grasp visually the electronic information arranged for each page. The user unfamiliar with the computer can also easily understand the information structure in the order of pages for the electronic information. [0155]
  • According to this embodiment of the invention, the user can easily grasp visually the absolute position of the page being currently accessed with respect to the amount of information provided for the computer in the order of arranging the tags. And the user can also easily grasp the relative position between the page or chapter being currently accessed and the arbitrary page or chapter, using the order of arranging the tags. [0156]
  • FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for defining the terms such as “tag width” for use in the present specification. Normally, in the English text or Japanese text written laterally, the characters are written from left to right and the page is turned from right to left. On the other hand, for the Japanese text written vertically, the page is turned from right to left. Also, in the case where the A4 sheets of paper for a report are fastened at the upper side, the page is turned from bottom to top. In this way, the direction of turning the pages may exist in the books, reports or magazines. Herein, a term “page turning direction” referred to above means one direction as indicated by [0157] reference numeral 34, or a direction of turning the page from right to left in FIG. 18. The page turning direction is typically parallel (or anti-parallel) to the character writing direction, or orthogonal to it. In this embodiment, a term “tag display direction” is defined as a direction orthogonal to the page turning direction. The tag is displayed along this tag display direction 35. When turning the page from right to left, the tag display direction is from top to bottom. When turning the page from bottom to top, the tag display direction is from left to right as shown in FIG. 14.
  • Herein, a term “tag length” is defined as a distance from the start point of tag to the end point in the tag display direction. A term “tag width” is defined as a length of tag in the page turning direction. Accordingly, if the tag length and the tag width are determined, the size required to display one tag can be determined. In this embodiment, the position of arranging the tag is variable along the tag display direction, depending on various elements. Herein, a term “tag height” can be defined as a length from one end point in the tag display direction. When the tag is trapezoid, the elements specifying one tag are “tag length”, “tag width” and “tag height”, as far as the angle of trapezoidal side face is determined. [0158]
  • <Adjusting the Tag Length at the Start Time of Access>[0159]
  • In this embodiment, a method of determining the tag length at the start time of access is disclosed. The [0160] electronic information 1A or electronic information 1B has the total page number which is variable depending on its contents. In the example as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the length in the tag display direction divided by the total page number is equal to a tag length. However, as the total page number increases, the tag length is too short to effect a simple uniform allocation. In an example as shown in FIG. 19, solving means for favorably effecting the tag display when the total page number is large is shown.
  • When there are so many number of pages that it is difficult to draw the tags in the operation area with sufficient tag interval, the tag is drawn by gradually narrowing the interval between adjacent tags up to a certain page at the height proportional to the absolute value of a difference in the page number between the tag associated with the access area and other tags as shown in FIG. 20 (semantic display). The tags beyond the certain page range are superposed and drawn densely with a fixed tag interval. [0161]
  • Since in the semantic display the tag length is shorter successively for every tag, the tags for the current page and its neighboring pages can excellently have the tag content such as page number, and the position of the current page relative to the total page number is clear. Further, an interface which enables the user to detect the total page number at a glance can be constructed. [0162]
  • Referring to FIG. 19, first, the length of a [0163] current page tag 8 appendant to the current page is determined by referring to the tag length as the reference (step S41, a step of calculating the tag length). Subsequently, the length of each tag is set to be shorter at lower hierarchical level, with the tag length of the current page tag 8 as the maximum value (step S41, a step of creating the semantic display). And when the length of tag display area is too insufficient for the total page number, a line tag display 51A is set for a certain range (step S43, a step of setting the line tag). And the tags are displayed semantically (step S44). Depending on the content of page information, an interval display line for changing the thickness of tag contour line may be inserted at every page intervals (a step of inserting the interval display line). And the tag content such as page number is displayed for the tag capable of indicating the tag content in accordance with the tag length and the font size for display (step S46). Further, the page information of current page is displayed in the information access area.
  • Referring to FIG. 20, the current page is the 28th page. With the tag length of this [0164] current page tag 8 as the maximum value, the tag length is shorter in the order of tags 9 a, 9 b, . . . , 9 e. In this example, the tag length is 0.8 times the previous one for each tag from the current page to effect the semantic display. Among the tag shapes indicated by reference sign 51A, the line tags which have only lower lines displayed are also implemented by this multiplier of 0.8. If the resolution of the display can not follow the line interval of tag, the tags are continuously displayed by the line. In the example of FIG. 20, the previous and next tag lengths are 0.8 times the current tag length, with the tag length of the current page tag 8 in the other tag display area 7 as the reference. As a result, the tag length which is displayed at the uppermost level (tag for 27th page) in the one tag display area is equal to the tag length indicating the 29th page. In this way, by making the tag length of the previous page shorter than the tag length of the current page, the current page tag is highlighted, with more deepness.
  • The semantic display as shown in FIG. 20 may be made at any time, irrespective of the total page number of page information. But in the case where the total page number is small, the semantic display may impede the effective use of the tag display area. Therefore, it is desirable to switch between the normal display as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 and the semantic display as shown in FIG. 20 in accordance with the total page number of page information. This switching of display mode can be made based on the minimum reference length of the current page tag. That is, when all the tags are allocated over the entire length of the tag display area in the tag display direction, as shown in FIG. 16, the semantic display may be effected, as far as the tag length per tag is below the reference length. [0165]
  • FIG. 21 is a table showing a data structure of the page information display data required to switch between these display modes. The minimum reference length is simply determined by the number of dots, as shown in FIG. 21A, when the physical length and resolution of the display are predetermined. On the other hand, to provide a data structure not dependent on the actual display, an input of the physical length and the number of dots for display may be accepted at the time of execution, and the minimum reference length may be determined by the physical length in meter or the like. In this way, the user can use uniformly various apparatuses in respect of different page turning operations or different displays of deepness using the tag. When the semantic display is made, the sense of deepness can be represented corresponding to the total number of pages, even if the tag display area is not necessarily provided on the left and right sides. However, from the aspect of recognizing the current page position promptly, the tag display area is desirably provided on the left and right sides. [0166]
  • In the example of FIG. 21A, the page information display data includes the display dot number data of the display unit in each of the page turning direction and the tag display direction, the total page number data of electronic information stored in the storage unit, the dot number data per unit tag which is equal to the number of dots in the dot number data divided by the total page number in the total page number data, and the minimum reference data having the minimum reference width of tag which is predetermined for the tag length in the page turning direction and the minimum reference length of tag which is predetermined for the tag length in the tag display area, which are in comparison with the number of dots per unit tag. In the example of FIG. 21A, the length of unit tag is selected to a larger value between 80 dots which is the minimum reference length and the value of 1600 dots divided by the total page number ap. Using this data, it is possible to determine the tag length of current page tag, and switch between the normal display and the semantic display. [0167]
  • In the example of FIG. 21B, the minimum reference length is selected to a larger value between 2 cm or the value of the tag display area length divided by the total number page ap. The [0168] page information manager 43 can obtain the physical length per dot from the relation between the display dot number data and the tag display area length, and thereby the number of dots per unit tag length.
  • The page information display data may have the tag ratio data which is referred to when the dot number data per unit tag is shorter than the minimum reference data. This tag ratio data is a ratio of the tag length varied successively from the current page of electronic information to the end page or start page relative to the tag length of the minimum reference data. And the tag length is calculated successively from higher to lower hierarchy by referring to this tag ratio data. Then, the tag is overwritten in the tag display area from lower to higher hierarchy. In this way, the tags can be overlapped well. When the total page number is large, the line tag is automatically produced in accordance with the resolution. Consequently, a consistent interface can be constructed. [0169]
  • FIG. 22 is a functional block diagram showing the configuration for designating the tag shape using the page information display data as shown in FIG. 21. In an example of FIG. 22, there are provided a [0170] storage unit 4 for storing the electronic information having a plurality of pages in a unit of page of predetermined size, a display 49 having an information access area 5 for displaying the electronic information stored in the storage unit 4 in a unit of the page, and a page information display portion 56 for enabling the electronic information stored in the storage unit 4 to be read on the basis of the page specifying information externally input, and displayed in the information access area.
  • The [0171] display 49 has a tag display area 6 provided along with the information access area on one end or both ends in the page turning direction to turn the page of page information in the information access area 5. Further, it comprises a tag shape calculating portion for calculating the length of tag appendant to each page in the tag display direction on the basis of the length of tag display area in the tag display direction which is orthogonal to the page turning direction, and the total page number ap of electronic information stored in the storage unit 4, and a tag display portion 55 for displaying the tag in the tag display area on the basis of the length of tag which is calculated by this tag shape calculating portion.
  • The tag shape calculating portion comprises a tag display area [0172] width determining portion 53 for determining the width of the tag display area, on the basis of the minimum reference width of tag and the size of electronic information in the page turning direction, for example. For example, if the residual length of the page turning area when the longitudinal length of page information is enlarged or reduced to the longitudinal length of the display is below the minimum reference width, the enlargement or reduction ratio of page information may be changed. Also, the tag shape calculating portion comprises a current page tag length setting portion 54 for setting the tag length of current page to the tag length per unit tag which is the length of the display 49 in the tag display direction, divided by the total page number ap of electronic information, and setting the length of current page tag appendant to the page being currently displayed to the minimum reference length, when the tag length is shorter than the minimum reference length of tag. When the tag length of current page is set to the minimum reference length, the semantic display is made in this example. Or otherwise, the normal display is made.
  • To display the tags on the basis of the minimum reference length, a tag table (or the page information display data as shown in FIG. 21) containing the minimum reference width of tag in the page turning direction and the minimum reference length of tag in the tag display direction which are predetermined on the basis of the size of the [0173] display 49 is stored in the storage unit 4. The tag display portion 55 may display the tag having a width determined by the tag display area width determining portion 53 and a length determined by the current page tag length setting portion 54 in the tag display area.
  • With the configuration as shown in FIG. 22, the operation of each portion can be realized by the CPU and the program, in the same way as shown in FIG. 15. For example, a program for calculating the tag length, using the page display information of the data structure as shown in FIG. 21, has a tag length calculation command for calculating the length of each tag appendant to each page in the tag display direction on the basis of the length of tag display area in the tag display direction and the total page number ap of electronic information stored in the [0174] storage unit 4, and a tag display command for displaying the tag in the tag display area on the basis of the length of each tag calculated in accordance with the tag length calculation command. The tag length calculation command contains a subcommand for effecting translation between the physical length and the number of dots, if the minimum reference length of FIG. 21B is the physical length.
  • FIG. 23 is s flowchart showing a process of determining the tag width and the tag length using the data of the data structure as shown in FIG. 21B. Firstly, the physical length information of the [0175] display 49 in the page turning direction is acquired (step S51, a step of acquiring the physical length). Subsequently, the minimum reference width of tag at the resolution of the display is calculated on the basis of the physical length information acquired at step S51 of acquiring the physical length and the minimum reference width of tag in the page turning direction which is predetermined by the physical length (minimum tag width calculation step). And the width of the tag display area is determined on the basis of the minimum reference width dependent on the display 49 calculated at step S52 of calculating the minimum tag width and the size of electronic information (step S52 of determining the tag display area width).
  • Subsequently, the physical length information of the display in the tag display direction which is orthogonal to the page turning direction is acquired (step S[0176] 53, a step of acquiring the physical length). Then, the minimum reference length of tag at the resolution of the display is calculated on the basis of the physical length information acquired at step S53 of acquiring the physical length and the minimum reference length of tag in the tag display direction which is predetermined by the physical length (minimum tag length calculation step). When the tag length per unit tag which is equal to the length of the display in the tag display direction divided by the total page number of electronic information is shorter than the minimum reference length, the length of current page tag appendant to the page being currently displayed is set to the minimum reference length (step S54, a step of setting the current page tag length).
  • And the tag having a width determined at step S[0177] 52 of determining the tag display area width and a length determined at step S54 of setting the current page tag length is displayed in the tag display area (step S55, tag display step). Thereby, the tag having an excellent shape can be displayed without being dependent on the resolution.
  • FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a process of switching between the normal display and the semantic display. As shown in FIG. 24, the total page number of electronic information is acquired in starting the display of page information (step S[0178] 61). And the tag length per tag is calculated by dividing the number of dots in the tag display direction by the total page number (step S62). Then, a comparison is made between the calculated tag length and the minimum reference tag length as shown in FIG. 21 for example. If the calculated tag length is longer, the normal display is effected (step S64). On the other hand, if the calculated tag length is shorter than the minimum tag length, the semantic display with a multiplier of 0.8 is effected (step S65).
  • The page information display device for enabling the selection of the display mode may comprise, in addition to the configuration of FIG. 22, a tag display mode selecting portion for selecting the normal display in which the length of tag to be displayed in the tag display area is a fixed length, when the total page number of electronic information is a predetermined number or less, or selecting the semantic display in which the tag length is reduced stepwise from the current page tag, when the total page number exceeds the predetermined number. [0179]
  • <Adjusting the Tag Length After Turning the Page>[0180]
  • A specific example will be described below in which the tag is redisplayed, after some operation is applied to the page information and tag on the display, and a different page is displayed. As to how to display the tag after turning the page, the adjustment of the tag height is required. In the example of FIGS. 16 and 17, the normal display is effected. The current page tag is moved from the other [0181] tag display area 6 to the one tag display area 7 while maintaining the tag height constant. In the semantic display as shown in FIG. 20, the tag can not be continuously moved with the constant tag height maintained. In the present example, the measures for this point are disclosed.
  • FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a process for redisplaying the tag after turning the page. In an example of FIG. 25, firstly, the tag height of current page is calculated (step S[0182] 71). This step S71 of calculating the current page tag height calculates the height of current page tag appendant to the current page number of current display object, on the basis of the ratio of the current page to the total page number of electronic information. In the normal display, the height of tag once displayed is not changed. On the other hand, in the semantic display, the height of current page tag is changed in accordance with the page number of current page to be displayed.
  • Subsequently, the current page read from the [0183] storage unit 4 is displayed in the information access area. The tag appendant to the current page is displayed in the one or other tag display area 6, 7 at a current page tag height calculated at step S71 of calculating the current page tag height (step S72 of displaying the current page tag). Before or after this step S72 of displaying the current page, the tag 9 appendant to each page succeeding the current page is displayed in the one tag display area 9 at a smaller height than the current page tag height (step S73 of displaying the succeeding page tag). On the other hand, the tag appendant to each page preceding the page number of current page is displayed in the other tag display area 10 at a larger height than the height of current page tag (step S74 of displaying the preceding page tag).
  • Subsequently, the procedure waits for an operation of turning the page (step S[0184] 75). Further, when there is the operation of turning the page, the page turning is displayed like animation with the tag appended to the page being turned, while maintaining the tag height of current page tag, as shown in FIG. 26 (step S76). Then, the page after being turned is set as the current page (step S77).
  • In this example, a process after resetting the current page is different between the normal display and the semantic display. That is, in the semantic display (step S[0185] 78), the tag height of current page is recalculated on the basis of the ratio of the current page to the total page number (step S71 of redisplaying the same ratio height tag). On the other hand, in the normal display, the current page tag is displayed while maintaining the height of each tag (step S72 of redisplaying the same height tag). Thereafter, this process is repeated.
  • A page display program for implementing this process may have, for example, a tag length calculation command, a normal display command, a semantic display command, and a tag height control command. Specifically, the tab length calculation command calculates the tag length per tag on the basis of the total page number information of electronic information and the length of the tag display area. The normal display command sets the calculated tag length to a display tag length when the calculated tag length is above a predetermined tag length. The semantic display command sets the predetermined tag length to the tag length of current page when the calculated tag length is below the predetermined tag length and sets the length of tag appended to each page preceding and succeeding the current page to a shorter length stepwise, with the tag length of current page at the uppermost level. The tag height control command redisplays the tag at the constant height of each tag during the normal display or by calculating the tag height on the basis of the page number of a new current page during the semantic display when there is an operation of turning the current page displayed in the information access area. The semantic display command may be initiated when the normal display command can not be executed. Since the tag height control command requires the information of whether the normal display or the semantic display is made, a flag indicating the current display mode may be stored in the page table [0186] 41.
  • Referring to FIG. 26, the current page that is the fourth page is turned when the fourth page is displayed. Then, the fifth page is displayed. To provide the user with an impression like turning pages of the book, the display area of the page being turned is reduced gradually and the display area of a new page to be displayed next is increased gradually in the example of FIG. 26. This display example involves various patterns, which may be selected in accordance with the display processing ability of the controller for use. For example, if the controller can perform a [0187] high speed 3D processing (with the CPU and operating system), the state of turning the paper may be displayed in the three dimensions. Also, the page may be revolved around the tag display area 6 in the tag display direction as a central axis while the data being displayed is transformed in accordance with the turning movement.
  • In the example of FIG. 26, the motion of turned page is followed by the motion of tag, as indicated by [0188] reference numeral 58. That is, the page information display method of this example includes a page turning step of moving the current page in the page turning direction, and displaying a page to be displayed by a tag operation in the information access area, when the tag operation is applied to a tag displayed in the tag display area, and a tag moving step of moving the tag appended to the current page between the one and other tag display areas in the page turning direction along with the movement of the current page, when the current page is moved at the page turning step. Thereby the position of page being moved becomes clear. Also, in the example of displaying the page turning in the three dimensions, the tag shape may be deformed and moved while following the page. For example, if the tag width is made gradually slender, the behavior of the page moving upward with the rotation can be represented.
  • FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a process of expanding the tag during the semantic display. First of all, the tag is on the semantic display (step S[0189] 81). And if there is a pointer event near the tag display area, a tag being displayed is designated near the coordinate at which the pointer event occurs, for example, when a pointer 2A comes closer to the tag display area which is selectively displayed. In an example of FIG. 28, the pointer indicated by reference sign 2A comes closer to a line tag indicating the 48th page among the line tags displayed and designates it. In this case, the lengths of the tag indicating the 48th page and its preceding or succeeding three or five tags are reset to substantially as long as the tag length of current page and displayed (step S84 of expanding the tag). Then, the page information of the 48th page may be stored in the cache memory.
  • If there is no tag operation (step S[0190] 85), the tag display is restored after the elapse of a certain time (step S87) On the other hand, if there is any operation on the expanded tag displayed, the processing such as turning the page is performed (step S86). A program for executing the processing as shown in FIG. 27 may have a tag expanding command for resetting the tag length displayed on the basis of the relation between the tag displayed in the tag display area and the coordinate or pressure of the pointer, and a tag length return command for returning the tag length resets to its original length after the elapse of a certain time since the coordinate or pressure of the pointer returns to the steady state.
  • Referring to FIG. 28, the tag expanding process will be described again. A tag which is located closest to the [0191] pointer 2A (tag of the 49th page in FIG. 28) when the distance h between the tag and the input cursor is below a certain distance H1, is drawn at a height inversely proportional to the distance h with a gradually wider interval between tags as the coordinate of an input cursor comes closer to the tag (tag of the 49th page). When the distance between the fingertip coordinate and the tag (tag at the 49th page) is greater than a predetermined distance H2, the change of the interval between tags as shown in FIG. 28 gradually returns to a display state of FIG. 20, after the elapse of a fixed time from exceeding it.
  • <Holding Plural Pages and Tag Display>[0192]
  • FIG. 29A is a view illustrating one example of the display format of tag integral type. In the example as shown in FIG. 29A, the turning state display data creating step as designated at step A[0193] 24 in FIG. 10 comprises a substep of creating the turning state display data having a tag portion along with the current page in the case where the tag is appended to the current page. In the example as shown in FIG. 29A, the display of compression type as shown in FIG. 13A is effected along with a tag 74A appended to the current page. Because of the compression type, the tag width of the tag 74B in which the page is more compressed is narrower than the tag width of the tag 74A.
  • FIG. 29B is a view illustrating one example of the display format of plural pages integral type. In the example as shown in FIG. 29B, the turning state display data creating step A[0194] 24 as shown in FIG. 10 comprises a substep of deferring the transformation of each held page until transformation of the current page for each of the pages held in the case where the number of holding pages detected in the page turning operation detecting step is two or greater. In the example as shown in FIG. 29B, the display format of slide type as shown in FIG. 12B is applied for three consecutive pages consisting of a current page 75A displaying the character “A”, a next page 75B of the current page displaying the character “B”, and a next display page 75C displaying the character “C”, wherein the current page 75A and the next page 75B are transformed with a time difference. Thereby, the next page 75B is displayed while the page is being turned, whereby the state of turning plural pages is seen more intuitively by the user. As shown in FIG. 29B, in the case where a tag is appended to each page, the tag may be moved along with each page.
  • FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating one example of a tag display control in accordance with a holding operation according to the fourth embodiment of the invention. Referring to FIG. 30, the page information display method comprises a page holding operation detecting step A[0195] 31 of outputting a page holding operation detecting signal, when a predetermined page holding operation is performed at a current page read from the electronic information memory 4 that is to be displayed at present, and a before-turning holding object page tag coloring step A42 of coloring a tag for a holding object page that is held by the page holding operation with a different color from other tags in one tag display area that is displaying a tag appended to the current page, when the page holding operation is initially detected in the page holding operation detecting step A31. At this step A42, the tag of the page actually held by the page holding operation is colored, whereby the user can confirm the effect on the number of holding pages by the holding operation due to the pressure or time at a glance. In particular, if the position of the page of interest is roughly grasped from the position of page tag, the coloring of the tag is confirmed while the pressure is being changed minutely, thereby making the operation more correct and simpler.
  • And the page information display method further comprises a next display page setting step A[0196] 34 of setting a page having a page number that is equal to the current page added or subtracted by the amount of holding operation to a next display page to be displayed at the next time, when the page holding operation detecting signal is output in the page holding operation detecting step A31, and a page turning process step A35 of displaying the next display page set in this next display page setting step A34 in place of the current page on the display unit.
  • In the example as shown in FIG. 30, the page information display method further comprises, following the page turning process step A[0197] 35, an after-turning holding object page tag coloring step A36 of coloring a page tag for the holding object page, for which the page turning process is completed, in the other tag display area where a tag appended to a current page that has become the new current page after the page turning process is not displayed, with a different color from other tags.
  • The holding operation may be performed not only in the information access area but also on the tag. FIG. 31 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of the holding operation on the tag. As shown in FIG. 31, holding plural pages is effected by applying a predetermined pressure on a [0198] tag 76 that has been expanded.
  • A holding display circle may be displayed on the tag. In the examples as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the coloring of tag by the holding operation and the display of the holding display circle on the tag are employed at the same time. Though in the example as shown in FIG. 31, the succeeding pages of the current page, or the pages after the expanded tag are only held, the preceding page can be held if the same operation is performed in the [0199] tag display area 6 at the preceding page. That is, the pages 77 held in FIG. 32 are pages before the tag being operated currently. On the other hand, in an example as shown in FIG. 33, the pages 77 held are the pages after the tag being operated currently.
  • FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating one example of the tag display when an operation of turning plural pages collectively is performed. In the example as shown in FIG. 34, the page information display method comprises a current page tag height calculating step A[0200] 41 of calculating a display height of the current page tag on the basis of the position of the current page with respect to the total number of pages for the electronic information stored in the storage unit 4, a succeeding page tag display format designating step A42 of designating a display format of the succeeding page tags on the basis of the tag height of the current page tag calculated in the current page tag height calculating step and the total number of succeeding pages, and a preceding page tag display format designating step A43 of designating a display format of the preceding page tags on the basis of the tag height of the current page tag and the total number of preceding pages before or after the succeeding page tag display format designating step.
  • Each of the display format designating steps A[0201] 42, A43 may designate the display format in accordance with the tag display method as described in the fourth embodiment. That is, giving the highest priority to a position of the current page tag height, the display format is determined depending on the number of residual pages at this position.
  • And the page information display method further comprises a page holding operation detecting step A[0202] 44 of outputting a page holding operation detecting signal, when a predetermined page holding operation is performed at the current page, a next display page setting step A45 of setting a page having a page number that is equal to the current page added or subtracted by the amount of holding operation to a next display page to be displayed at the next time, when the page holding operation detecting signal is output in the page holding operation detecting step A44, and page turning process steps A46 to A49 of displaying the next display page set in the next display page setting step in place of the current page on the display unit.
  • And in this page turning process step, first of all, a page turning process is started (step S[0203] 46). Subsequently, the display control of the holding object page tag is made (step A47). This display control step of the holding object page tag comprises displaying the tags appended to the current page that is to be turned and the holding object pages that are held by the holding operation in the display format in accordance with the page turning direction specified in the preceding page tag display format designating step A42 or the succeeding page tag display format designating step A43 in the information access area, while following the transformation or movement of the current page in the current page turning step. Subsequently, the page turning step is made (step A48). Further, the display control step A47 of the holding object page tag is repeated until the page turning process is completed (step A49).
  • As shown in FIG. 35A, if the turning of plural pages is executed in a state where the page tag is expanded, a part for holding plural pages and the previous page indicated by the fingertip involving the current page (i.e., the paper face) are turned collectively. At this time, in a process example as shown in FIG. 34, the tag display of a part indicated by [0204] reference numeral 79 in FIG. 35 is effected in accordance with the display format in the tag display area 6 for displaying the tag of the previous page in a state where the drawing is inverted in a tag width direction. That is, when the execution of the page turning process is started, the next display page is treated as the current page, and the tag height is recalculated to redisplay the tag in the tag display area for the succeeding page. And the tags appended to the pages from the current page being moved by the page turning process to the last page of the holding object pages are displayed in accordance with the display format for the previous page, while following the movement of the page turning process.
  • Also, in the example as shown in FIG. 35, the page information display method further comprises, following the page holding operation detecting step A[0205] 44, a before-turning holding object page tag coloring step of coloring a tag for a holding object page that is held by the page holding operation with a different color from other tags in one tag display area that is displaying a tag appended to the current page, when the page holding operation is initially detected in the page holding operation detecting step A44. For example, in the case where a pressure circle according to the third embodiment is displayed within the access area 5, the coloring of tags for the held pages are changed, because it is considered that the number of holding pages may not be grasped by simply referring to the pressure circle.
  • FIG. 36 is an explanatory view for highlighting the tag display in the information access area in the process of turning plural pages collectively as shown in FIG. 34. In an example as shown in FIG. 36, the holding object page tag display control step A[0206] 47 comprises a substep of setting the tags appended to the current page that becomes the turning process object and the holding object pages held in the holding operation in a display format of equal and close interval between tags. As indicated by reference numeral 79B in FIG. 36, the tags are set in the display format in which the interval between tags is close and equal, the position of the current page after being turned can be clarified promptly while the state of turning plural pages collectively is displayed excellently.
  • FIG. 37 is an explanatory view illustrating a tag display example after completion of turning plural page collectively. In this example as shown in FIG. 37, the page information display method further comprises, following the page turning process step A[0207] 49, an after-turning holding object page tag coloring step of coloring a page tag for the holding object page, for which the page turning process is completed, in the other tag display area where a tag appended to a current page that has become the new current page after the page turning process is not displayed, with a different color from other tags. Owing to the provision of this after-turning holding object page tag coloring step, the original position of page is apparently seen in the case where plural pages are turned collectively, and particularly as the position is visually memorized, the original page is easily restored after turning pages with the holding operation.
  • FIG. 38 is an explanatory view illustrating an example in which a pressure circle is displayed over a tag, wherein FIG. 38A is a view illustrating an example of a left page tag, FIG. 38B is a view illustrating an example of a right page tag, and FIG. 38C is a view illustrating an example in which the tag coloring and the tag pressure circle are employed at the same time. In the examples as shown in FIG. 38, the page information display method further comprises, following the page holding operation detecting step A[0208] 44, a tag holding circle display step of displaying a circle 78 corresponding to the number of holding object pages in the page holding operation over a tag for which the page holding operation is detected, when the page holding operation is initially detected in the page holding operation detecting step A44. By displaying the holding circle over the tag, it is possible to visually display a difference from turning pages with a simple click.
  • FIG. 39 is an explanatory view illustrating an example in which a holding object page is changed depending on an operation direction upon the tag, wherein FIG. 39A is a view illustrating one example of holding a previous page, and FIG. 39B is a view illustrating one example of holding a succeeding page. In the examples as shown in FIG. 39, it is determined whether to hold the preceding page or the succeeding page, depending on whether the fingertip is moved upward or downward with reference to the time when the plural pages turning operation is made effective by the fingertip pointing to the page tag. The range for moving the fingertip upward or downward is within one tag. Hence, it is possible to distinguish this operation from the continuous page turning by dragging the tag. And the number of holding pages is determined in accordance with the magnitude of pressure to execute the plural pages turning operation. [0209]
  • EXAMPLES
  • The examples of this invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing the configuration of hardware resources of this example, which is common to the following examples. A page information display device of this example comprises an [0210] input unit 2 for inputting a pointer event and a storage unit 4 for storing a variety of sorts of information, as shown in FIG. 40. An output unit 49 is provided along with a display manager 44 which is a display driver for controlling this output unit 49 and a primary storage unit 46 for storing the image data of one screen or two screens on the display unit. Also, the input unit 2 is provided along with an access operation manager 45 for issuing an access operation command to the display manager, on the basis of a pointer event which has occurred in the input unit 2, and a timer 48 for clocking the elapsed time during this access operation.
  • The [0211] storage unit 4 stores the page information and the tag displayed on a display 1, the electronic information 1A which is the page information of plural pages, the page information 1B having the amount of information by which the electronic information 1A can be displayed in the information access area 5 in a unit of page, and a page table 41 containing the configuration of this access information 1B. The storage unit 4 has the electronic information 1A stored in a universal file format such as a text format, a word processor document format, an image format, an HTML format, an XML format, a PDF format, or a scanned image format. Of course, the electronic information 1A described herein is available, even when it is stored in a storage device at the remote location which is connected via the telephone line or a network such as LAN. Such electronic information 1A is converted into a liner image file by a page converter 42 in this example. For example, if the image data is one file for each page, the display process can be facilitated. In this case, the page information is in the image format which is a bit map format, a TIFF format, a PICT format, a JPEG format, or a GIF format. The page table 41 has index information in which the tag content 18 such as page number corresponds to the page information one to one. Since the page information involves image information, the access information is passed through the page converter 42 having a copyright protection feature to embed an electronic openwork. This process can be easily implemented on the configuration of the page information display device. Also, a page information manager 43 manages the data structure or order of the access information 1B which is then converted by the page converter 42 with reference to the page table 41. In the example of displaying the newspaper, more articles of information may be possibly defined within one page of page information.
  • The page information display device in this example comprises a high speed [0212] primary storage 46 for display, a secondary storage 47 which functions as a prefetch cache for display, and the page information manager 43 for managing the predetermined page information to be read from the storage unit 4 in accordance with the page being displayed at present or the access operation and stored in the secondary storage 47 These can improve the responsibility to the access operation.
  • In order to transform into electronic data the information which is conventionally printed on the paper to enable access to the information intuitively, the [0213] input unit 2 may be a device which enables the input operation to be made, while simulating the sense of turning the page of a book with a fingertip as faithfully as possible, such as a touch panel, in this example. And the display 1 may be a device enabling the display of high-resolution. It is preferable that an input area of the input unit 2 covers the tag display area 6, 7 of the display 1, thereby providing the input area and the tag display area 6, 7 integrally. Of course, with a computer configuration as shown in FIG. 65, the access of electronic information is enabled sufficiently. This does not necessarily mean that the touch panel or the high resolution output device must be used.
  • FIGS. 40 and 41 are flowcharts showing the outline of the operation in this example. Firstly, to check the cache capacity, the [0214] page information manager 43 confirms the capacity of the secondary storage 47 (step S21). Subsequently, the page information manager 43 confirms the presence or absence of the electronic information 1A and the page table 41 (step S22). The page information manager 43 manages the page converter to convert the electronic information 1A into the page information 1B, when the electronic information 1A exists in the storage unit 4 and the page table 41 does not exist in the storage 4. In this case, the page converter 42 firstly checks the file format of the electronic information 1A (step S23). The amount of information which can be displayed in the information access area 5 is automatically converted into the page information in a unit of page (step S24). This conversion process will be described later in detail as the related art. Then, the page information manager 43 determines the tag content 18 such as page number for the page information in the order of creating the page information, and registers the electronic information 1A as the page information in the page table 41 (step S25).
  • At step S[0215] 24, the electronic information 1A in different file formats is made accessible as one book having a linear information structure. The page table 41 can be rewritten and changed without departing from the linear information structure accessible in this example.
  • In this example, the access information to be displayed on the [0216] display 1 is stored in the primary storage 46 which has the highest speed in reading or writing the information. Also, the secondary storage 47 having a higher speed in reading and writing the information than the storage unit 4 has stored the access information for the user to access at the next time. Therefore, if the page to be displayed by the access operation is determined, the page table 41 is referred to (step S26). A page to be displayed is stored in the primary storage 46 (step S27) The previous and next pages are stored in the secondary storage 47 (step S28). This is to enable the high-speed display by transferring the page information from the secondary storage 47 to the primary storage 46, when the page information requested by the display manager 44 is in the secondary storage 47. If the page information requested by the display manager 44 is not present in the secondary storage 47, the page information is taken from the access information in the storage unit 4 and stored in the primary storage 46.
  • As shown in FIG. 42, the [0217] tag 8, 9, 10 appendant to the page is drawn in the tag display area (step S31). And the page information stored in the primary storage 46 is displayed in the information access area 5. Subsequently, the procedure waits for an input into the input unit 3 such as a touch panel (step S33).
  • If an access operation such as turning the page is applied to the [0218] input unit 3, the access operation manager 45 judges the content of operation to pass the sort of access to the display manager 44 (step S34). The sorts of access may include, for example, turning the page one after another, switching promptly from the accessed page to another page, turning the pages in a certain range roughly, and displaying only the desired article contained in the electronic information over the entire access area in full.
  • If the sort of access is passed to the [0219] display manager 44, the page information to be displayed in the information access area 5 is determined from the sort of access. For example, when there is a request to the page information manager 43 of storing the access information to be displayed in the primary storage 46, another page information for the user to access newly at the next time is retrieved from the storage unit 4 and stored in the secondary storage 47, if the access information stored in the primary storage 46 can be passed from the secondary storage 47 (step S35).
  • The [0220] secondary storage 47 should store more succeeding pages of the currently displayed page, thereby resulting in higher hit rate because the access is typically made in an ascending direction of page number. When there is a pointer event such as expanding the tag, as will be described later, the page subjected to tag expansion may be read beforehand, and stored in the secondary storage 47.
  • First Example
  • In the above example, the page information having a size of one page is a minimum unit of data. On the contrary, in the case where an entire paper face of the newspaper is displayed, or where a magazine article is displayed, each article may be displayed in enlargement. This may be done by enlarging the information of a book or the like, or the illustration in the book. Such enlargement may be performed in such a way as to create beforehand the page information itself at high resolution and enlarge the page information that is the image data, or create and enlarge for displaying the page information in the vector data of a text or diagram. In the case where the enlarged display of the article is made, the length of the current page tag should be set to several times the normal length. Thus, it is possible to recognize intuitively any article in the electronic information being enlarged, for example, with reference to the shape of tag. [0221]
  • In the case where the article information is provided, the page information may have the article information expressly defined with the scope of coordinates for the article information in the page information. In the case where the user points to the page information with the fingertip, using the operation unit (input unit) [0222] 2, if the coordinate values indicated by the fingertip are contained within the scope of coordinates, the article information corresponding to the scope of coordinates is displayed on the display 1. Also, the scope of coordinates for this article information becomes data which does not depend on the device, if it is defined in terms of the ratio of the article information relative to the length of the page information.
  • FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating a process example for displaying in enlargement the article information in the first example. As shown in FIG. 43, the page information display method of this example comprises an article information enlarging operation detecting step A[0223] 51 of outputting an article information enlarging operation detecting signal having the positional information as to an article information enlarging operation, when the article information enlarging operation is detected on the operation unit, in the case where plural articles of information making up a current page are defined in the current page read from the storage unit 4 that is to be displayed at present, and an article information enlarging display step A52 of displaying in enlargement the article information at a position indicated by the positional information on the display unit, in the case where the article information enlarging operation detecting signal is output in the article information enlarging operation detecting step A51. By allowing for the enlargement of the article information, the article information can be accessed or read more clearly, for example, in the case where the newspaper information is involved in the electronic information. The article information enlarging operation detecting step A51 further comprises a substep of outputting an article information enlarging operation detecting signal including a click position as the positional information, for example, when a click is made on the operation unit 1C. That is, by clicking on the article information to be read, that article information can be enlarged.
  • In the example as shown in FIG. 43, the page information display method further comprises, following the article information enlarging display step A[0224] 52, an article display page turning inhibit control step A53 of inhibiting a normal page turning operation while the article information is being displayed in enlargement. If the page turning operation is enabled while the article information is displayed in enlargement, a linear structure of the page information in which the page number is incremented one by one is broken, and it is apprehended that the user is confused. That is, if the access is permitted by turning pages while the article information is being displayed, the page information gets rid of the linear information structure, because the information structure is branched at that time. As a result, it is difficult for the user to reconstruct the information structure easily. Therefore, in a preferred embodiment, the page turning process during the display of article is inhibited. Accordingly, all the operations that are performed during the display of article are interpreted as the operation of restoring the page information having that article information to the original state.
  • FIG. 44 is an explanatory view illustrating an example of effecting the continuous enlargement operation by dragging plural articles. In this example of continuously enlarging plural articles, the article information enlarging operation detecting step A[0225] 51 further comprises an article information continuous enlarging operation detecting substep of outputting an article information continuous enlarging operation detecting signal in the case where two or more articles of information is contained in a locus of dragging, when a dragging is made on the operation unit. And the article information enlarging display step A52 may comprise a continuous enlarging display substep of displaying in enlargement the article information individually in time series at every predetermined time interval in the order of the dragging, in the case where the article information continuous enlarging operation detecting signal is output. The continuous enlarging display step may comprise a substep of displaying in enlargement the two or more articles of information in time series continuously at a time interval in accordance with a rate of the dragging, for example.
  • As shown in FIG. 44, the page information (fourth page) having articles of [0226] information 82A, 82B, 82C, 82D is displayed as the current page. At this time, when a dragging is made along an arrow indicated by reference numeral 82F, this operation is judged as the article information continuous enlarging operation. In this case, the continuous enlarging display step involves first displaying the article information as indicated by reference numeral 82A, and after the elapse of a certain access time, or upon an article information reduction instruction (e.g., a click on the enlarged article information of the touch panel), displaying the next article information 82B and then the article information 82C. By enabling this article information continuous enlarging operation, the article information can be steadily perused consecutively after the operation. Therefore, the operability can be enhanced without making the interface complex.
  • FIG. 45 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of displaying in enlargement the article with a wire frame. In the example as shown in FIG. 45, the article information enlarging display step A[0227] 52 comprises an enlarging time wire frame display substep of enabling a wire frame, with a start region at an outside periphery of the article information to be enlarged, to be displayed at multiple stages of varying sizes up to an outside periphery of the display unit. In the example as shown in FIG. 45, when the wire frame display is made, a wire frame as large as surrounding the article information is displayed. Subsequently, a plurality of wire frames are created at the same aspect ratio for the outside periphery of this wire frame and the outside periphery of the information access area 5. And the wire frames are displayed in succession from the wire frame surrounding the article information to the outside periphery of the information access area 5. By displaying the wire frames, the enlargement of the article information is made apparent, and the user can recognize visually in which region the article information is located before enlargement.
  • The page information display method may further comprises, following the article information enlarging display step A[0228] 52, a reducing time wire frame display step of enabling a wire frame, with a start region at an outside periphery of the display unit, to be displayed at multiple stages of varying sizes up to an outside peripheral position of the article information at the current page, when an enlargement completing operation for completing the enlargement of the article information is performed. Then, where the article information enlarged currently was located in the page information can be displayed excellently.
  • To enlarging the article information more clearly, the article information may be once embossed, and then enlarged. Also, the article information itself may be drawn while being enlarged physically, instead of the wire frame display. FIG. 46 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of enlarging the article information after embossing it. In the example as shown in FIG. 46, the article information enlarging display step comprises a substep of embossing an article chosen from the current page. [0229]
  • FIG. 46A is a view illustrating a state in which an article is shaded for embossing, FIG. 46B is a view illustrating a state in which a selected article is being enlarged, and FIG. 46C is a view illustrating a state after the enlargement process is completed. Herein, an embossing process is implemented by applying the [0230] article information 84 with a shade 85. Also, the reduced article data to be embossed may be superposed on the page information. By cutting and displaying an image of the article data from the paper face data, an embossed portion may be replaced with the article data, when the enlargement of the article is ended.
  • FIG. 47 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of a tag display when the article information is enlarged. In the example as shown in FIG. 47, the article information enlarging display step A[0231] 52 comprises an enlarged tag appending step of enlarging a tag as well as appending the enlarged tag to the enlarged article information, in the case where the current page has the tag. In the example as shown in FIG. 47, to make clear whether the page information is displayed over the paper face, or the article information is displayed in detail, the appearance of the tag is changed. Thereby, the transfer of the access state by the access operation can be presented to the user. For example, when the article information is displayed in enlargement, a tag 8A appendant to the page information containing that article information is enlarged. In this way, the tag is displayed in enlargement along with the article information to clarify that the article information is being access in enlargement.
  • FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating one example of an article information table which lists in correspondence the page information and the article information. A way of storing the article information may include enlarging part of the page information by having the page information of high resolution and referring to the range of coordinates for the article information. In this case, the presence or absence of the article information and the designation are defined in each page information, and the range of coordinates is determined for each article information, as shown in FIG. 48. This article information table is stored in the [0232] storage unit 4 to enlarge the article information.
  • Second Example
  • In a second example, a process of turning pages for the page information upon a pointer event will be described below. This second example involves an even driven type page turning process. And various kinds of the page turning process are realized employing an operation on the tag and an operation on the page information (information access area). [0233]
  • <Page-turning Operation with Tag>[0234]
  • The tag display as shown in FIGS. [0235] 16 or 20 is through an interface which is not only superior in the respect of allowing the user to intuitively know the total page number of electronic information or the position of current page relative to the total page number of electronic information, but also favorable as a tool to allow the user to display a desired page from among a plurality of pages defined linearly. In this example, there is provided an interface in which an operation of turning the page for a book is a metaphor, and using a tag which is considered to be an artificial presence, the operation can be intuitively understood, irrespective of the computer experiences.
  • In this example, a pointer driven interface is adopted. The pointer may be a fingertip or a pen-type pointer, for the use of a [0236] touch panel display 49, or a mouse 105 or an arrow operated by the arrow key of a keyboard 104 and displayed on the screed, for the use of a CRT connected to a computer 100. To prompt the user for intuitive understanding, the touch panel is desirable.
  • There are roughly four ways of turning the page for a book, including turning one page after another to read, turning the pages quickly while searching for a key word, opening a predetermined page by referring to the page number, and turning plural pages at once forcefully. When turning the pages quickly, the pages may be turned by the use of elasticity of paper, with the end portion of pages pressed, without displaying the entire page. To make these operations metaphoric, various pointer events to the tag are used. [0237]
  • One access means of switching promptly from one page being accessed to another page to access is a click of tag. The sheets may be brushed at the side edge in turning the page for the book. The similar operation is conducted by the click of tag. The user directly touches the [0238] tag 8, 9, 10 of the page which the user wants to access, so that the page information corresponding to the tag content 18 such as page number of the designated tag 8, 9, 10 is displayed in the information access area 5, as desired, while the behavior of turning the page is displayed visually. In a case where there occurs a pointer down within the tag, and a pointer up within the same tag, the page with the tag appended may be turned.
  • One access means of turning the pages sporadically in a certain range of pages roughly involves touching the tag with a fingertip and keeping the fingertip away from the tag consecutively, while tracing with the fingertip plural tags appendant to the page information desired to read by turning the pages, so that each page information is displayed in the order of touching the tag in the [0239] information access area 5, with a constant display interval and consecutively. Then, the timer 48 measures the time until plural tags have been touched. At a display rate proportional to the measuring time, the page information can be displayed in succession. In practice, when turning the pages sporadically, the sheets to be turned are turned over, with the side edge of the sheets pressed. In the same way, the tags are consecutively pointed down, to effect the turning of the pages in succession.
  • Referring to FIGS. 49 and 50, a pointer event driven interface will be described below in detail. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a process in the second example of the present invention. First, a current page is displayed (step S[0240] 91). Each tag is also displayed in the normal display mode or the semantic display mode (step S92 of displaying the tag). Then, the procedure waits for a pointer event (step S93). If there occurs a pointer event, a page turning operation is performed in accordance with the sort of event (step S94 of controlling the even driven display).
  • FIG. 50 shows the relation between the pointer event and the page turning process. First, when a certain tag is dragged, a dragged page is moved gradually as shown in FIG. 26, and the next page of that tag is displayed (page turning step). Then, the page may be moved along with the tag appended. Also, when a certain tag is clicked, a page indicated by the clicked tag is displayed. If there is a difference between the pointer down position and the pointer up position within the same tag, that difference being above a predetermined threshold in the page turning direction, the next page of that tag may be displayed. [0241]
  • In a case where a tag is dragged over plural tags, that is, there occurs a pointer down at a certain tag and then a pointer is moved in the tag display direction without pointer up, then the pointer is up at another tag, the pages indicated by the dragged tag are displayed successively in the order of being dragged. If the pointer down time or pressure is beyond a predetermined threshold in the tag or the information access area near the tag, a plurality of pages may be moved at a time, supposing that the number of sheets in accordance with the time or pressure are seized. Then, the tag being seized may be moved dynamically to the neighborhood of the pointer in accordance with the variation in time or pressure. [0242]
  • In the page information display device for performing such page turning operation, the [0243] access operation manager 45 may be provided with an event driven display controller. Each operation as shown in FIG. 50 can be also implemented by the CPU which executes the program. In this case, a method for each pointer event may rely on the use of a program which defines each operation.
  • <Event in the Information Access Area>[0244]
  • Referring to FIG. 50 again, in the case where the time or pressure of pointer down is equal to or greater than a certain value, the process of holding plural pages is common on the tag and the page information. The process of turning the page by dragging in the direction of turning the page is a pointer event for the page information. Also, the operation for the page information may involve clicking on the article information or dragging plural articles. [0245]
  • A drag to turn the page and a drag to effect the continuous enlargement of the article can be discriminated in accordance with the locus of dragging. FIG. 51 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of a process for selecting one of the page turning and the continuous display of article information in a locus of dragging. In the example as shown in FIG. 51, an event driven display control portion comprises a page selection function for each locus direction for selecting a page having a smaller page number or a larger page number than that of a page being displayed at present on the basis of the locus of pointer from the pointer down to up. Also, the event driven display control portion may have an article continuous display function of continuously displaying in enlargement the article information overlapped on a path of the locus on the basis of the path of the locus. [0246]
  • FIG. 51A is a view illustrating the locus on the straight line, and FIG. 51B is a view illustrating the locus having a curve. As shown in FIG. 51A, for a [0247] locus 86 of the straight line extending beyond a predetermined area R, the page turning process is determined. On the other hand, for a locus 87 that is curved, the selection of the article information is determined, as shown in FIG. 51B.
  • In this way, the tag is designated, or an operation is performed on the page information in this example, whereby it is possible to access the electronic information at any page by changing the display rapidly from the page being accessed to the electronic information at that page. Hence, the user can switch the page information in an easy manner. [0248]
  • Third Example
  • In a third example, a process of prefetching the page information will be disclosed below. Typically, the page information may be read sequentially one page after another with high possibility. Therefore, it is conceived that plural pages following the current page are prefetched and stored in a VRAM (primary storage) [0249] 46 or a cache memory (secondary storage) 27. However, since plural pages are turned in the embodiment, the measures taken will be described below.
  • FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating an operation of this example. In the example as shown in FIG. 52, a current page A is displayed (step A[0250] 56). And a page turning operation is identified (step A57). Then it is confirmed whether or not turning plural pages is valid (step A58). In the case of turning plural pages, the pressure is measured (step A59), and the number of pages corresponding to the pressure is calculated (step S60). And from the current page A and the number of holding pages N, a next page C to be displayed at the next time is determined if the turning operation is made at this time (step A61).
  • And it is checked to see whether or not there is a sufficient capacity to secure the page C in the VRAM (step A[0251] 62). IF there is less sufficient capacity in the VRAM, the page B which has resided in the VRAM for the longest time is abrogated (step A63). At this time, the page number Bn of the abrogated page B is memorized. On the other hand, if the VRAM has a sufficient capacity to memorize the page C, the page C is stored in the VRAM (step A64).
  • If the page turning operation is actually performed, the page C is set to the current page (step A[0252] 67), and the following step is performed (step A68). On the other hand, if there is no page turning operation, turning plural pages has been cancelled, whereby the page C is deleted from the VRAM, and the page B is stored again in the VRAM (step A65)
  • FIG. 53 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of a state of turning plural pages collectively. As shown in FIG. 53, in the page information display device of this example, the [0253] display controller 3 comprises a cache memory (secondary storage) 47 for memorizing temporarily the page information that is judged to be displayed on the touch panel among the electronic information stored in the electronic information memory 4, a continuous page prefetch control portion 3B for storing in advance the page information having a page number following the page number of the current page being displayed at present on the touch panel in the cache memory, and a page turning process control portion 62 for effecting a page turning process by selecting one or more pages in accordance with an operation on the touch panel 1. And the continuous page prefetch control portion 3B has a plural pages-turning time deleting function 3D of deleting the page data in the plural pages from the cache memory 47, in the case where a page turning operation of plural pages is detected by the page turning process control portion 62.
  • The continuous [0254] prefetch control portion 3B prefetches plural pages following the current page from the storage unit 4 and stores them in the secondary storage 47. On the other hand, the plural pages turning time deleting function 3D is to delete the page data in plural pages from the cache memory 47, if the operation of turning plural pages is detected by the page turning process control portion 62. The data skipped by turning plural pages is deleted from the cache memory 47 to make effective use of the capacity of the cache memory.
  • In the example of dealing with the article information, the [0255] display controller 3 may comprise an article information prefetch control portion for storing the article information within the current page in the cache memory if the current page contains the article information. FIG. 54 is an explanatory view illustrating an example for memorizing the page information of high resolution. In the example as shown in FIG. 54, the individual article data is produced from the data of one page. In this example, the article information prefetch control portion creates beforehand the article information while the current page is being displayed, and stores it in the cache memory or VRAM. FIG. 55 is an explanatory view illustrating an example of memorizing the page information and the article information separately. In this case, the article information prefetch control portion reads the individual article information from the storage unit 4, and stores it in the VRAM 46.
  • Fourth Example
  • A method of creating the page information accessible by the page information display device from the [0256] electronic information 1A stored in the storage unit 4 will be specifically described below. The above page information display device has a capability of access in a universal file format widely used for the electronic information, such as a text format, an image format, an HTML format, an XML format, or a PDF format. Therefore, when the linear information structure of access information is defined, it is desirable that each file format has an information structure in view of the information in a unit of page such as a book. However, as for the specific information structure of each file format, it is presumed that its specific structure can be recognized by the page information display device. The reason is that the page information display device is not intended to analyze the specific structure to each file format as its main purpose, and it is generally considered that the information structure can be easily analyzed from the file format as the conventional art.
  • The universal file formats widely used as the electronic information can be classified into four categories, depending on the information structure. A first category is typically a text format of information structure. The feature is that the length of one line of sentence, or the size or kind of font, is not defined, and the number of lines is not defined like a rolled book having no unit of page. Therefore, to gain access in a unit of page on the page information display device, the size or kind of font is first defined to determine the amount of information contained in one page. Consequently, the page screen image can be determined, and stored in the storage unit as the access information, which can be accessed on the page information display device. [0257]
  • A second category is an image format of information, such as a bit map format, a TIFF format, a PICT format, a JPEG format, or a GIF format. The page information display device creates the access information having the image size translated so that the image format of information may be fully contained in the access area. Then, the information of the image format is divided by the size of the information access area to create the article information. And the access information and the article information are registered in the page table to enable access with the page information display device. [0258]
  • A third category is typically an HTML format or an XML format of information structure. In order to gain access to these file formats in the page information display device, it is necessary to create a page table corresponding to a hyperlink structure and a frame (means for displaying the electronic information in respective areas of divided display screen). First of all, a conversion method of the hyperlink structure in the page information display device will be described below. The hyperlink structure allows the file on the Internet to be set at the link destination. Therefore, for all the information of HTML format or XML format, it is of no use to define the linear information structure by automatically looping the link destination, because the number of pages is increased without limit. Therefore, the page information display device creates the access information only for the electronic information present within the same domain of electronic information to translate the information in the HTML format or XML format into the linear information structure. If the link destination is outside the same domain, the electronic information is ignored in the process of creating the linear information structure. [0259]
  • A fourth category is a PDF format (manufactured by Adobe: a file format accessible by AcrobatReader) of information structure. Since the electronic information of the PDF format is in a unit of page, the page information display device makes direct use of the electronic information of the PDF format in the given page order. The access information is created by transforming the image information of each page in the electronic information of the PDF format into the size which can be displayed in the access area. When the electronic information of the PDF format has the link structure, the link is ignored to secure the linear information structure, thereby making it possible to gain access to the information structure of the PDF format. [0260]
  • Generally, it is desirable that the data in any of various formats is once transformed into the image data. To handle the access information as the image information, the third party is not allowed to easily alter the content, and the electronic papermark can be readily embedded into the access information according to the conventional art. Also, the access information can be readily applied on the surface of a virtual object as the texture information. [0261]
  • FIG. 56 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the page information processing unit that converts the ML data in the fourth example of the invention. In the example as shown in FIG. 56, a page information display device comprises reception means [0262] 93 for receiving the ML data described in a make-up language via a communication line from a server, ML data conversion means 94 for converting the ML data received by the reception means 93 into the image data in a unit of page of predetermined size, an electronic information memory 4 for memorizing the page information that is the image data converted by the ML data conversion means 94, a touch panel 1 for displaying the page information stored in this electronic information memory 4 as well as inputting an operation to gain access to the page information, and a display controller 3 for controlling the display of the page information stored in the electronic information memory on the basis of an operation content input into the touch panel 1.
  • And the ML data conversion means [0263] 94 comprises a page number appending portion 95 for converting a link structure of the ML data into one dimensional book structure as well as appending sequentially the page number to the page information after conversion. Further, the display controller 3 comprises an event driven display control portion 97 for selecting the page information of a page having a smaller page number or a larger page number than that of a page being displayed at present on the touch panel as a next page to be displayed at the next time on the basis of a locus from the pointer down to up on the touch panel.
  • In the example as shown in FIG. 56, the page data described in the make-up language and having the link structure that is the third data format is converted into the linear structure that can be dealt with in this example. FIG. 57 is an explanatory view illustrating one example of the link structure of an ML page, wherein FIG. 57A is a view illustrating one example of the link structure, and FIG. 57B is a view illustrating an example in which the link structure is transformed into the book structure. In the case where the pages N[0264] 2 to N7 are defined in three hierarchies C1, C2 and C3 from a home page N1 that is a route, these pages can not be directly treated as the page information in this embodiment.
  • In this example, in the case where the specific ML data is specified in URL, the ML data within its domain is downloaded, and then converted into the book structure. Within a single domain, it is possible to prevent the infinite number of pages from being downloaded by the hyperlink. The page [0265] number appending portion 95 converts the link structure of the ML data into the one-dimensional book structure and appends sequentially the page number to the page information after conversion. And the ML data converting means 94 converts the ML data of the structure as shown in FIG. 57 into the image data in the unit of page of predetermined size.
  • This page [0266] number appending portion 95 converts the ML data into the book structure having the linear structure. Because each page is appended with the page number, the operation of turning one page, appending the tag, or holding plural pages is enabled.
  • In the example as shown in FIG. 57, a [0267] link structure 200 as shown in FIG. 57A is translated into the structure as shown in FIG. 57B. Specifically, the ML pages N2, N3, N4 linked under the ML page N1 are arranged in the order of link. Similarly, the ML pages N5, N6, N7 linked under ML the pages N2, N3 are arranged in the order of link under the ML information N2, N3 to be linked. By repeating this scan, the structure as shown in FIG. 57B is produced.
  • The ML data conversion means may comprise a tree [0268] structure converting portion 96 for designating a single tree structure from the link structure 200 of the ML data as well as converting the tree into a one-dimensional book structure by searching the tree in a predetermined search order. This tree structure converting portion 96 searches the link structure of the ML data, giving priority to the depth in the example as shown in FIG. 57. Also, it may search the link structure, giving priority to the width. In the case where the depth is given priority, the preorder scan may be effected outputting from the side closer to the route of tree.
  • FIG. 58 is an explanatory view illustrating another example of the link structure of the ML page. In this example, in the case where one ML page N[0269] 7 has links L37 and L47 with two or more ML pages present at an upper hierarchy C2, a link L37 with the ML information N3 having a smaller page number at the hierarchy C2 is made effective, and a link L47 with the page information N4 is ignored. Also, in the case where the link L23, L67 exists at the same hierarchy C2, C3, as shown in FIG. 59, these links are all ignored. In the case where the file of HTML format with a frame defined is the page information, the frame which is a heading for other pages is placed at the upper hierarchy, and the above process is performed.
  • In the case where the page information is accessed while the ML page is converted, the [0270] display controller 3 comprises a tag appending portion 98 for appending a tag indicating a page number of the page information to both end portions of the touch panel 1, the tag appending portion having a converted page tag display function of displaying the tag for the page having the page number appended by the page number appending portion on the touch panel. Then, the position and amount of page information accessible after conversion can be clear.
  • In the above example, the information provided via the Internet can be accessed with a simple operation. [0271]
  • Fifth Example
  • FIG. 60 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a page information display device for controlling the tag display at the time of streaming in a fifth example of the invention. As shown in FIG. 60, the page information display device comprises reception means [0272] 93 for receiving the page information via a network 91 from a server 90, an electronic information memory 4 for memorizing the page information being received by this reception means 93, a touch panel 1 for displaying the page information stored in the electronic information memory 4 as well as inputting an operation to gain access to the page information, and a display controller 3 for controlling the display of the page information stored in the electronic information memory on the basis of an operation content input into the touch panel 1.
  • And the [0273] display controller 3 comprises a tag appending portion 98 for displaying a tag indicating the content of the page information stored in the electronic information memory on the touch panel, and a streaming time dynamic tag appending control portion 99A for operating the tag appending portion as the page information is being received by the reception means. Since the tag appending control portion 99A appends the tag to the page information downloaded, the user can grasp to which page the page information has been downloaded while perusing the current page.
  • Also, the [0274] display controller 3 may comprise a streaming time dynamic tag coloring control portion 99B for coloring a tag which has been received with a different color from the tags which have not been received, as the page information is being received by the reception means 93, and a streaming time dynamic tag length control portion 99C for enabling the tag appending portion to create a tag having a length corresponding to the amount of information already received in one page of the page information as the page information is being received by the reception means 93.
  • FIG. 61 is a view illustrating an example of controlling the tag display in accordance with the amount of downloaded data in the configuration as shown in FIG. 60, wherein FIG. 61A is a view illustrating an example of displaying the tag for the page which has been completely downloaded, and FIG. 61B is a view illustrating an example of setting the tag for the page being downloaded to the tag length in accordance with the downloaded volume. In this example, when the streaming technique is utilized, the operation is controlled such that in the portion where the display page is not preserved locally, the tag is not displayed. The user is notified that the page can not be accessed by displaying no tag. [0275]
  • In the example as shown in FIG. 61A, the pages up to the sixth page have been downloaded. In the example as shown in FIG. 61B, if the page data has not been downloaded, the length of tag is shortened. To indicate that the enlarging operation is not allowed, the data being downloaded may be interlace displayed. [0276]
  • FIG. 62 is a view illustrating an example of controlling the tag display in accordance with the amount of downloaded data in all pages in the configuration as shown in FIG. 60, wherein FIG. 62A is a view illustrating an example of normally displaying the page tag only, and FIG. 62B is a view illustrating an example of normally displaying the page tag by the length of tag in accordance with the volume of one page that has been downloaded. If the total number of pages in the object (contents) to be downloaded can be first confirmed on the main system side, the page tags corresponding to the total number of pages are drawn, and the page tag of the downloaded page is displayed with the number, as shown in FIG. 62A. For example, for the page data that has not been downloaded, the page number is not displayed so as to clearly distinguish it from the page tag of downloaded page, or the page tag is colored with a different color from the page tag of downloaded page. [0277]
  • In the example as shown in FIG. 62B, in the case where 70% is downloaded, for example, the page tag is displayed 70% in color like a bar graph, whereby a downloaded state of the data by streaming is visualized. As described above, the streaming technique is employed by providing the restriction that the page not downloaded (0%) can not be accessed. [0278]
  • And in the example as shown in FIG. 62B, the seventh page is being downloaded. Since the seventh page has been downloaded by 70%, it is indicated that the bottom side of the page tag (shaped like a trapezoid) is displayed by 70%. Namely, the size of page tag is changed in accordance with the downloaded volume so as to visualize the downloaded volume by streaming clearly. [0279]
  • In this application of the streaming technique, it is presumed that the data of a linear book structure is downloaded. However, the data conversion may be made into the predetermined data format in the same way as in the fourth example. In this case, the display of tag may be made depending on whether the page data is converted or not. [0280]
  • Sixth Example
  • In a sixth example, various operation contents are stored as a history to make up for a delay of the system response when the user is skilled in the operation. FIG. 63 is an explanatory view illustrating an example of handling the history information in the sixth example of the invention, wherein FIG. 63A is a view illustrating one example of the history information in which the commands for limited operations are memorized, and FIG. 63B is a view illustrating one example of the history information in which the commands for all operations are memorized. [0281]
  • As shown in FIG. 63, the operation history is described in the history information. In the example as shown in FIG. 63A, since the operation history memorized serves as a supplementary function when the drawing method of the system can not be followed, a complex page turning operation (e.g., a direct page turning operation or a continuous page turning operation) wherein the operation and the drawing can not be synchronized well, and an operation (e.g., enlargement or reduction) that is not performed before the drawing is completed may not be described in the history information to avoid the divergence of the operation. [0282]
  • In the example as shown in FIG. 63B, all the operation events are stored in the history information. In a simple page turning operation (sequential page turning operation), if there is a more delay time between the operation and the drawing, the operation is so divergent that the user may be confused. Hence, the number of saving the operation history should be limited to avoid the divergence (i.e., inconsistency behavior between the user's operation image and the system behavior) of the operation. For example, the event description characters of the sequential page turning operation are sequentially described directly from the top on a history file. And an event is processed sequentially from the top, and if processed, its operation event is deleted from the history file. FIG. 64 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing an operation thread and a drawing thread independently. At step A[0283] 75, the operation and the drawing are connected.
  • Comparative Example
  • Some advantages of the embodiments and examples as described above will be described below by comparison with the conventional example. A special display of touch panel type as shown in FIG. 15 is not used, but the computer as shown in FIG. 65 is used to gain access to the page information. However, a [0284] computer 100 is a machine having a display unit 102 and a main unit 103. Hence, the user layer who can operate an electronic oven but is not good at reservations of the video program may have an impression of difficulties of operation. In particular, the operation by a keyboard 104 or a mouse 105 is troublesome in the respect of simply accessing the information, as compared with the device as shown in FIG. 15.
  • Further, when the electronic information provided in the computer is accessed, as opposed to accessing the paper information, the user is required to become skillful in the operations specific to the conventional graphical user interface, using an input unit such as [0285] keyboard 104 or mouse 105. Therefore, for example, the user is obliged to perform the operations which is greatly different from a routine work of turning the page such as when the book is read. In particular, it is difficult for the user unfamiliar with the computer to easily gain access to the electronic information.
  • The operation method specific to the conventional graphical user interface as described herein is to operate a virtual input device which is abstractly displayed on the output unit of the computer, using an input cursor which can be operated by the mouse. The virtual input device means, for example, a [0286] scroll bar 303, a pop-up menu 304, and pages 301, 302 or the like of thumbnail representation displayed on the output unit of the computer as shown in FIG. 66.
  • As shown in FIG. 66, the electronic information of one page is displayed on the same screen, including the next page, depending on the size of the display and the amount of electronic information. This is moved by using the [0287] scroll bar 303, or the page is moved by using the thumbnail. However, since the scroll bar is artificial and never used in the practical access of books, it is necessary to become skillful in operating appropriately the direction or size.
  • On the contrary, the present invention makes use of the tag. When the tag is appended to the page of information side by side, most users may recall the label attached to the book. Therefore, it is sufficiently expected that the user is informed to use the tag when the user wants to move the page without any teaching. Further, the total amount of page information can not be known intuitively, depending on the state of the scroll bar. On the other hand, in the above examples, the total amount of page information can be grasped at a glance owing to the tags appended to all the pages. And in the example where the tags are arranged on the left and right sides around the current page, the position of the current page relative to the total pages can be considerably made clearer than the conventional example as shown in FIG. 66. [0288]
  • It is common that the conventional tag for use with the paper or computer has a heading for plainly representing the content of information described in the page. This heading is plainly symbolic of the information extending over plural pages in most cases. Taking a quick look at the tags with the heading, it is not possible to know easily the heading designates the information from what page to what page. Since the heading information is typically composed of words or phrases, the heading information having too great number of characters is difficult to be attached to the tag. In such a case of attaching the heading to the tag with difficulty, the character size of the heading is reduced, or the characters to be written out of the tag are omitted. However, it is considered that the tag to be displayed in this situation does not exactly fulfill duties for the graphical user interface. On the other hand, in the examples of the present invention, since the page number is adopted as the tag content, the page position can be known in small size at a glance. Since the numbers are common throughout the world nations, the interface is consistent without regard to the language. [0289]
  • A sheet with tag for use in the spread sheet software (e.g., Excel (trademark) manufactured by Microsoft) is one of the interfaces in which the order of tags is not clearly defined. For instance, if a [0290] sheet 1 is opened, the arrangement of sheets is drawn in the order of the sheet 1 indicated by reference numeral 311, a sheet 2 indicated by reference numeral 312, and a sheet 3 indicated by reference numeral 313, as shown in FIG. 67A. However, if the sheet 2 is opened, it is possible to construe the arrangement of sheets in the order of sheet 2, sheet 1, and sheet 3 (or the order of sheet 2, sheet 3 and sheet 1), supposing that the physical sheets of paper are stacked, as shown in FIG. 67B. Only for the reason that the sheets are arranged in the order from the right, there is no gainsaying that the order of sheets is not changed, because it is unnatural visually. Some user layers may feel the interface to lack consistency and be irksome.
  • The conventional tag does not present a linear information structure (information structure having visually fixed order of [0291] sheet 1, sheet 2 and sheet 3 in this example) in accordance with the order of pages such as a book. Therefore, the user may be visually confused with respect to the order of electronic information. It is troublesome, particularly for the purposes of easily gaining access to the information, that the recognition of such information structure may sometimes confuse the user.
  • On the other hand, due to the arrangement of tags in this example, the user can understand a linear structure of page information from the state of overlapped tags in both the normal and the semantic display. After turning the page, the height or ratio of tag is consistently maintained. Accordingly, this interface may become attached to many users. [0292]
  • The present invention is configured and functions as described above and can provide a page information display method superior to the conventional display method in that when a dragging is made in a direction parallel or anti-parallel to the page turning direction, an operation of turning one page is effected in accordance with the dragging direction, and the pages of electronic information can be turned with the same operation as the movement of a user's hand when the actual pages of paper are turned, whereby the user unfamiliar with the computer can intuitively master the operations required to gain access to the electronic information, and the readers of the electronic information can be extended over the wide classes of society beyond the computer users. [0293]
  • The invention may be embodied in other specific forms without departing from the spirit or essential characteristic thereof. The present embodiments are therefore to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive, the scope of the invention being indicated by the appended claims rather than by the foregoing description and all changes which come within the meaning and range of equivalency of the claims are therefore intended to be embraced therein. [0294]
  • The entire disclosure of Japanese Patent Application No. 2000-078220 (Filed on Mar. 21, 2000) including specification, claims, drawings and summary are incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. [0295]

Claims (48)

What is claimed is:
1. A page information display method for displaying the electronic information using an information access device comprising a storage unit for storing the electronic information having plural pages of information in a unit of page of predetermined size, a display unit for displaying the electronic information stored in said storage unit in said unit of page, and an operation unit for inputting an operation to gain access to said page information, said operation unit being provided in the substantially same area as said display unit, comprising:
a page turning operation detecting step of outputting a page turning operation detecting signal when a dragging is made on said operation unit in parallel or anti-parallel to a predefined page turning direction at a current page read from said storage unit that is to be displayed at present;
a next display page setting step of setting a preceding page or a succeeding page immediately before or after the current page depending on a direction of said dragging operation to a next display page to be displayed at the next time, when the page turning operation detecting signal is output in said page turning operation detecting step; and
a page turning process step of displaying the next display page set in said next display page setting step in place of said current page on said display unit.
2. The page information display method according to claim 1, wherein said page turning operation detecting step further comprises a page turning operation judging substep of judging, as said page turning operation, an operation exceeding a minimum operation length in said page turning direction within a predefined allowance region in a direction orthogonal to said page turning direction.
3. The page information display method according to claim 1, wherein said page turning operation detecting step further comprises an operation rate calculating substep of calculating a page turning rate that is a speed of said page turning operation, and said page turning process step further comprises a display rate setting substep of setting a display rate corresponding to the page turning rate calculated in said operation rate calculating step to change the display from the current page to the next display page.
4. A page information display device having an electronic information memory for memorizing the electronic information having plural pages of information in a unit of page of predetermined size, a touch panel for displaying the electronic information stored in said electronic information memory in said unit of page, as well as inputting an operation to gain access to said page information, and a display controller for controlling the display of the page information stored in said electronic information memory on the basis of an operation content input into said touch panel,
wherein said display controller comprises:
a page turning operation detecting portion for outputting a page turning operation detecting signal when a dragging is made on said touch panel in parallel or anti-parallel to a predetermined page turning direction at a current page read from said electronic information memory that is to be displayed at present;
a next display page setting portion for setting a preceding page or a succeeding page immediately before or after the current page depending on a direction of said dragging operation to a next display page to be displayed at the next time, when the page turning operation detecting signal is output by said page turning operation detecting portion; and
a page turning process portion for displaying the next display page set in said next display page setting portion in place of said current page on said touch panel.
5. A storage medium for storing a page information display program for displaying the electronic information, employing an information access device having an electronic information memory for memorizing the electronic information having plural pages of information in a unit of page of predetermined size, a touch panel for displaying the electronic information stored in said electronic information memory in said unit of page, as well as inputting an operation to gain access to said page information, and a display controller for controlling the display of the page information stored in said electronic information memory on the basis of an operation content input into said touch panel,
wherein said page information display program comprises, as the commands for operating said display controller:
a page turning operation detecting command for outputting a page turning operation detecting signal when a dragging is made on said touch panel in parallel or anti-parallel to a predetermined page turning direction at a current page read from said electronic information memory that is to be displayed at present;
a next display page setting command for setting a preceding page or a succeeding page immediately before or after the current page depending on a direction of said dragging operation to a next display page to be displayed at the next time, when the page turning operation detecting signal is output; and
a page turning process command for displaying the next display page set in accordance with said next display page setting command in place of said current page on said touch panel.
6. A page information display method for displaying the electronic information, employing an information access device comprising a storage unit for storing the electronic information having plural pages of information in a unit of page of predetermined size, a display unit for displaying the electronic information stored in said storage unit in said unit of page, and an operation unit for inputting an operation to gain access to said page information, said operation unit being provided in the substantially same area as said display unit, comprising:
a page holding operation detecting step of outputting a page holding operation detecting signal when a predetermined page holding operation is made at a current page read from said storage unit that is to be displayed at present;
a holding page number displaying step of displaying the total number of holding pages in accordance with the amount of said page holding operation on said display unit, when the page holding operation is initially detected in said page holding operation detecting step;
a next display page setting step of setting a page having a page number that is equal to the current page added or subtracted by the amount of said holding operation to a next display page to be displayed at the next time, when the page holding operation detecting signal is output in said page holding operation detecting step; and
a page turning process step of displaying the next display page set in said next display page setting step in place of said current page on said display unit.
7. The page information display method according to claim 6, wherein said page holding operation detecting step further comprises a pressure holding page number calculating substep of calculating said number of holding pages in accordance with the magnitude of a pressure applied to the substantially same position of said operation unit.
8. The page information display method according to claim 6, wherein said page holding amount operation detecting step comprises a time holding page number calculating substep of calculating said number of holding pages in accordance with the elapsed time of a depressing operation that continues at the substantially same position of said operation unit.
9. The page information display method according to claim 7, wherein said holding page number displaying step comprises a substep of displaying a holding display circle defined with a radius of the size corresponding to said page holding amount on said display unit.
10. The page information display method according to claim 7, wherein said holding page number displaying step comprises a substep of displaying a multiloop consisting of a number of circles around the same center and corresponding to said page holding amount.
11. The page information display method according to claim 7, wherein said holding page number displaying step comprises a substep of displaying a coated circle defined with a radius of predetermined size, said circle being coated corresponding to said page holding amount.
12. A page information display device having an electronic information memory for memorizing the electronic information having plural pages of information in a unit of page of predetermined size, a touch panel for displaying the electronic information stored in said electronic information memory in said unit of page, as well as inputting an operation to gain access to said page information, and a display controller for controlling the display of the page information stored in said electronic information memory on the basis of an operation content input into said touch panel,
wherein said display controller comprises:
a page holding operation detecting portion for outputting a page holding operation detecting signal when a predetermined page holding operation is performed at a current page read from said electronic information memory that is to be displayed at present;
a holding page number display unit for displaying the total number of holding pages in accordance with the operation amount of said page holding operation on said display unit, when the page holding operation is initially detected by said page holding operation detecting portion;
a next display page setting portion for setting a page having a page number that is equal to the current page added or subtracted by said amount of holding operation to a next display page to be displayed at the next time, when the page holding operation detecting signal is output from said page holding operation detecting portion; and
a page turning process portion for displaying the next display page set in said next display page setting portion in place of said current page on said touch panel.
13. A storage medium for storing a page information display program for displaying the electronic information, employing an information access device having an electronic information memory for memorizing the electronic information having plural pages of information in a unit of page of predetermined size, a touch panel for displaying the electronic information stored in said electronic information memory in said unit of page, as well as inputting an operation to gain access to said page information, and a display controller for controlling the display of the page information stored in said electronic information memory on the basis of an operation content input into said touch panel,
wherein said page information display program comprises, as the commands for operating said display controller:
a page holding operation detecting command for outputting a page holding operation detecting signal when a predetermined page holding operation is performed at a current page read from said electronic information memory that is to be displayed at present;
a holding page number display command for displaying the total number of holding pages in accordance with the operation amount of said page holding operation on said display unit, when the page holding operation is initially detected upon said page holding operation detecting command;
a next display page setting command for setting a page having a page number that is equal to the current page added or subtracted by said amount of holding operation to a next display page to be displayed at the next time, when said page holding operation detecting signal is output in accordance with said page holding operation detecting command; and
a page turning process command for displaying the next display page set in accordance with said next display page setting command in place of said current page on said touch panel.
14. A page information display method for displaying the electronic information, employing an information access device having a storage unit for storing the electronic information having plural pages of information in a unit of page of predetermined size, a display unit for displaying the electronic information stored in said storage unit in said unit of page, and an operation unit for inputting an operation to gain access to said page information, said operation unit being provided in the substantially same area as said display unit, comprising:
a page turning operation detecting step of outputting a page turning operation detecting signal having the number of holding pages and a page turning direction defined, when a page turning operation for turning one or more pages is performed in said operation unit;
a next display page setting step of setting a preceding page or a succeeding page by said number of holding pages before or after the current page depending on said page turning direction to a next display page to be displayed at the next time, when the page turning operation is completed in said page turning operation detecting step and the page turning operation detecting signal is output; and
a page turning process step of displaying the next display page set in said next display page setting step in place of said current page on said display unit,
said page turning process step further comprising:
a next display page reading substep of reading said next display page from said storage unit, when said next display page is set;
a turning state display data creating substep of transforming the current page data making up the current page that is being displayed on said display unit at every unit display time, as well as creating the turning state display data into which said current page is transformed, when said page turning operation detecting signal is output; and
a turning state display data overwriting step of overwriting the turning state display data created in said turning state display data creating substep on the next display data read in said next display page reading substep at every unit display time until said turning state display data is exhausted.
15. The page information display method according to claim 14, wherein said turning state display data creating step further comprises an overwriting display control substep of deleting an area on the start point side in the page turning direction at every said unit time.
16. The page information display method according to claim 14, wherein said turning state display data creating step further comprises a slide display control substep of deleting an area on the end point side in the page turning direction at every said unit time as well as shifting the current page data by the amount of said deleted area in the page turning direction.
17. The page information display method according to claim 14, wherein said turning state display data creating step further comprises a compression display control substep of reducing the display length in the page turning direction at every said unit time as well as compressing said current page data to said reduced display length in said page turning direction.
18. The page information display method according to claim 14, wherein said turning state display data creating step further comprises:
a three dimensional space defining substep of defining a virtual space in a normal direction of said display unit;
a current page rotating and transforming substep of rotating and transforming said current page within said virtual space around the end point side in said page turning direction; and
a three dimensional display control substep of drawing a front side and a back side of the current page rotated and virtually transformed in said current page rotating substep in a two dimensional plane as viewed in a normal direction of said display unit as well as setting said drawing data to the turning state display data.
19. The page information display method according to claim 14, wherein said turning state display data creating step further comprises a substep of creating the turning state display data having said current page integrated with a tag portion, when a tag is appended to said current page.
20. The page information display method according to claim 14, wherein said turning state display data creating step further comprises a substep of transforming said current page ahead of transforming each of said holding pages, when the number of holding pages detected in said page turning operation detecting step is greater than one.
21. A page information display device having an electronic information memory for memorizing the electronic information having plural pages of information in a unit of page of predetermined size, a touch panel for displaying the electronic information stored in said electronic information memory in said unit of page, as well as inputting an operation to gain access to said page information, and a display controller for controlling the display of the page information stored in said electronic information memory on the basis of an operation content input into said touch panel,
wherein said display controller comprises:
a page turning operation detecting portion for outputting a page turning operation detecting signal with the number of holding pages and a page turning direction defined, when a page turning operation for turning one or more pages is performed on said touch panel;
a next display page setting portion for setting a preceding page or a succeeding page by said number of holding pages before or after the current page depending on said page turning direction to a next display page to be displayed at the next time, when the page turning operation is completed in said page turning operation detecting portion and the page turning operation detecting signal is output; and
a page turning process portion for displaying the next display page set in said next display page setting portion in place of said current page on said display unit,
wherein said page turning process portion comprises:
a next display page reading function of reading said next display page from said electronic information memory, when said next display page is set;
a turning state display data creating function of transforming the current page data making up the current page that is being displayed on said touch panel at every unit display time as well as creating the turning state display data into which said current page is transformed, when said page turning operation detecting signal is output; and
a turning state display data overwriting function of overwriting the turning state display data created in said turning state display data creating function on the next display page read in said next display page reading function until said turning state display data is exhausted.
22. A storage medium for storing a page information display program for displaying the electronic information, employing an information access device having an electronic information memory for memorizing the electronic information having plural pages of information in a unit of page of predetermined size, a touch panel for displaying the electronic information stored in said electronic information memory in said unit of page, as well as inputting an operation to gain access to said page information, and a display controller for controlling the display of the page information stored in said electronic information memory on the basis of an operation content input into said touch panel,
wherein said page information display program comprises, as the commands for operating said display controller:
a page turning operation detecting command for outputting a page turning operation detecting signal with the number of holding pages and a page turning direction defined, when a page turning operation for turning one or more pages is performed on said touch panel;
a next display page setting command for setting a preceding page or a succeeding page by said number of holding pages before or after the current page depending on said page turning direction to a next display page to be displayed at the next time, when the page turning operation is completed in accordance with said page turning operation detecting command and the page turning operation detecting signal is output; and
a page turning process command for displaying the next display page set in accordance with said next display page setting command in place of said current page on said display unit,
said page turning process command further comprising:
a next display page reading command for reading said next display page from said electronic information memory, when said next display page is set;
a turning state display data creating command for transforming the current page data making up the current page that is being displayed on said display unit at every unit display time as well as creating the turning state display data into which said current page is transformed, when said page turning operation detecting signal is output; and
a turning state display data overwriting command for overwriting the turning state display data created in accordance with said turning state display data creating command on the next display page read in accordance with said next display page reading command at every unit display time until said turning state display data is exhausted.
23. A page information display method for displaying the electronic information, employing an information access device having a storage unit for storing the electronic information having plural pages of information in a unit of page of predetermined size, a display unit for displaying the electronic information stored in said storage unit in said unit of page, and an operation unit for inputting an operation to gain access to said page information, said operation unit being provided in the substantially same area as said display unit, wherein said display unit has an information access area for displaying the electronic information stored in said storage unit in said unit of page, and one and the other tag display areas for displaying a tag indicating the content of said page, said tag display areas being provided at both ends of said information access area, comprising:
a page holding operation detecting step of outputting a page holding operation detecting signal, when a predetermined page holding operation is performed at a current page read from said storage unit that is to be displayed at present;
a next display page setting step of setting a page having a page number that is equal to the current page added or subtracted by said amount of holding operation to a next display page to be displayed at the next time, when the page holding operation detecting signal is output in said page holding operation detecting step; and
a page turning process step of displaying the next display page set in said next display page setting step in place of said current page on said display unit,
following said page holding operation detecting step, further comprising a before-turning holding object page tag coloring step of coloring a tag for a holding object page that is held by said page holding operation with a different color from other tags in one tag display area that is displaying a tag appended to the current page, when the page holding operation is initially detected in said page holding operation detecting step.
24. The page information display method according to claim 23, further comprising, following said page turning process step, an after-turning holding object page tag coloring step of coloring a page tag for said holding object page, for which said page turning process is completed, in the other tag display area where a tag appended to a current page that has become the new current page after the page turning process is not displayed, with a different color from other tags.
25. A page information display method for displaying the electronic information, employing an information access device having a storage unit for storing the electronic information having plural pages of information in a unit of page of predetermined size, a display unit for displaying the electronic information stored in said storage unit in said unit of page, and an operation unit for inputting an operation to gain access to said page information, said operation unit being provided in the substantially same area as said display unit,
wherein said display unit has an information access area for displaying the electronic information stored in said storage unit in said unit of page, a succeeding page tag display area for displaying a tag appended to a current page read from said storage unit that is to be displayed at present and the succeeding page tags appended to the pages succeeding said current page, and a preceding page tag display area for displaying the preceding page tags appended to the pages preceding said current page, comprising:
a current page tag height calculating step of calculating a display height of the current page tag on the basis of the position of said current page with respect to the total number of pages for the electronic information stored in said storage unit;
a succeeding page tag display format designating step of designating a display format of said succeeding page tags on the basis of the tag height of the current page tag calculated in said current page tag height calculating step and the total number of succeeding pages; and
a preceding page tag display format designating step of designating a display format of said preceding page tags on the basis of the tag height of said current page tag and the total number of preceding pages before or after said succeeding page tag display format designating step,
the method further comprising:
a page holding operation detecting step of outputting a page holding operation detecting signal, when a predetermined page holding operation is performed at the current page;
a next display page setting step of setting a page having a page number that is equal to the current page added or subtracted by said amount of holding operation to a next display page to be displayed at the next time, when the page holding operation detecting signal is output in said page holding operation detecting step; and
a page turning process step of displaying the next display page set in said next display page setting step in place of said current page on said display unit,
said page turning process step further comprising a holding object page tag display substep of displaying the tags appended to the current page that is an object of said turning process and the holding object pages held in said holding operation in a display format in accordance with a direction of the page turning process among those designated in said preceding page tag display format designating step or said succeeding page tag display format designating step within said information access area, following the transformation or movement of the current page in said current page turning process.
26. The page information display method according to claim 25, further comprising, following said page holding operation detecting step:
a before-turning holding object page tag coloring step of coloring a tag for a holding object page that is held by said page holding operation with a different color from other tags in one tag display area that is displaying a tag appended to the current page, when the page holding operation is initially detected in said page holding operation detecting step; and
an after-turning holding object page tag coloring step for coloring a page tag for said holding object page, for which said page turning process is completed, in the other tag display area where a tag appended to a current page that has become the new current page after the page turning process is not displayed, with a different color from other tags, following said page turning process step.
27. The page information display method according to claim 25, wherein said holding object page tag display control step further comprises a substep of setting the tags appended to the current page that becomes the turning process object and the holding object pages held in said holding operation in a display format of equal and close interval between tags.
28. A page information display method for displaying the electronic information, employing an information access device having a storage unit for storing the electronic information having plural pages of information in a unit of page of predetermined size, a display unit for displaying the electronic information stored in said storage unit in said unit of page, and an operation unit for inputting an operation to gain access to said page information, said operation unit being provided in the substantially same area as said display unit, wherein said display unit has an information access area for displaying the electronic information stored in said storage unit in said unit of page, and one and the other tag display areas for displaying a tag indicating the content of said page, the tag display areas being provided at both ends of said information access area, comprising:
a page holding operation detecting step of outputting a page holding operation detecting signal, when a page holding operation is performed for the tags displayed in said one or the other tag display area;
a next display page setting step of setting a page having a page number that is equal to the current page added or subtracted by said amount of holding operation to a next display page to be displayed at the next time, when the page holding operation detecting signal is output in said page holding operation detecting step; and
a page turning process step of displaying the next display page set in said next display page setting step in place of said current page on said display unit,
the method further comprising:
following said page holding operation detecting step, a tag holding circle display step of displaying a circle corresponding to the number of holding object pages in said page holding operation over a tag for which said page holding operation is detected, when the page holding operation is initially detected in said page holding operation detecting step.
29. A page information display method for displaying the electronic information, employing an information access device having a storage unit for storing the electronic information having plural pages of information in a unit of page of predetermined size, a display unit for displaying the electronic information stored in said storage unit in said unit of page, and an operation unit for inputting an operation to gain access to said page information, said operation unit being provided in the substantially same area as said display unit, comprising,
an article information enlarging operation detecting step of outputting an article information enlarging operation detecting signal having the positional information as to an article information enlarging operation, when the article information enlarging operation is detected on said operation unit, in the case where plural articles of information making up a current page are defined in said current page read from said storage unit that is to be displayed at present; and
an article information enlarging display step of displaying in enlargement the article information at a position indicated by said positional information on said display unit, in the case where the article information enlarging operation detecting signal is output in said article information enlarging operation detecting step.
30. The page information display method according to claim 29, wherein said article information enlarging operation detecting step further comprises a substep of outputting an article information enlarging operation detecting signal including a click position as said positional information, when a click is made on said operation unit.
31. The page information display method according to claim 29, wherein said article information enlarging operation detecting step further comprises an article information continuous enlarging operation detecting substep of outputting an article information continuous enlarging operation detecting signal in the case where two or more articles of information is contained in a locus of dragging, when a dragging is made on said operation unit, and said article information enlarging display step comprises a continuous enlarging display substep of displaying in enlargement said article information individually in time series at every predetermined time interval in the order of said dragging, in the case wherein said article information continuous enlarging operation detecting signal is output.
32. The page information display method according to claim 31, wherein said continuous enlarging display step further comprises a substep of displaying in enlargement said two or more articles of information in time series continuously at a time interval in accordance with a rate of said dragging.
33. The page information display method according to claim 29, further comprising, following said article information enlarging display step: an article display page turning inhibit control step of inhibiting a normal page turning operation while said article information is being displayed in enlargement.
34. A page information display method for displaying the electronic information, employing an information access device having a storage unit for storing the electronic information having plural pages of information in a unit of page of predetermined size, a display unit for displaying the electronic information stored in said storage unit in said unit of page, and an operation unit for inputting an operation to gain access to said page information, said operation unit being provided in the substantially same area as said display unit, comprising:
an article information enlarging operation detecting step of outputting an article information enlarging operation detecting signal having the positional information as to an article information enlarging operation, when the article information enlarging operation is detected on said operation unit, in the case where plural articles of information making up a current page are defined at said current page read from said storage unit that is to be displayed at present; and
an article information enlarging display step of displaying in enlargement the article information at a position indicated by said positional information on said display unit, in the case where an article information enlarging operation detecting signal is output in said article information enlarging operation detecting step,
said article information enlarging display step further comprising an enlarging time wire frame display substep of enabling a wire frame, with a start region at an outside periphery of said article information to be enlarged, to be displayed at multiple stages of varying sizes up to an outside periphery of said display unit.
35. The page information display method according to claim 34, further comprising, following said article information enlarging display step, a reducing time wire frame display step of enabling a wire frame, with a start region at an outside periphery of said display unit, to be displayed at multiple stages of varying sizes up to an outside peripheral position of the article information at said current page, when an enlargement completing operation for completing the enlargement of said article information is performed.
36. The page information display method according to claim 34, wherein said article information enlarging display step further comprises an enlarged tag appending step of enlarging a tag as well as appending said enlarged tag to said enlarged article information, in the case where said current page has the tag.
37. The page information display method according to claim 34, wherein said article information enlarging display step further comprises a substep of embossing an article chosen from said current page.
38. A page information display device having an electronic information memory for memorizing the electronic information having plural pages of information in a unit of page of predetermined size, a touch panel for displaying the electronic information stored in said electronic information memory in said unit of page, as well as inputting an operation to gain access to said page information, and a display controller for controlling the display of the page information stored in said electronic information memory on the basis of an operation content input into said touch panel,
said display controller comprising an event driven display control portion for enabling the pages displayed on said touch panel to be changed on the basis of the time and locus from a pointer down to up on said touch panel,
said event driven display control portion comprising a page selection function for each locus direction for selecting a page having a smaller page number or a larger page number than that of a page being displayed at present on the basis of the locus of pointer from said pointer down to up.
39. The page information display device according to claim 38, wherein said electronic information memory has the article information making up each page of said electronic information, and said event driven display control portion has an article continuous display function of continuously displaying in enlargement the article information overlapped on a path of the locus on the basis of said path of the locus.
40. A page information display device having an electronic information memory for memorizing the electronic information having plural pages of information in a unit of page of predetermined size, a touch panel for displaying the electronic information stored in said electronic information memory in said unit of page, as well as inputting an operation to gain access to said page information, and a display controller for controlling the display of the page information stored in said electronic information memory on the basis of an operation content input into said touch panel:
said display controller comprising a cache memory for memorizing temporarily the page information that is judged to be displayed on said touch panel among the electronic information stored in said electronic information memory, a continuous page prefetch control portion for storing in advance the page information having a page number following the page number of the current page being displayed at present on said touch panel in said cache memory, and a page turning process control portion for effecting a page turning process by selecting one or more pages in accordance with an operation on said touch panel,
wherein said continuous page prefetch control portion has a pages turning time deleting function of deleting the page data in plural pages from said cache memory, in the case where a page turning operation of plural pages is detected by said page turning process control portion.
41. The page information display device according to claim 40, wherein said display controller comprises an article information prefetch control portion for storing the article information within said current page in said cache memory in the case where the article information is contained in said current page.
42. A page information display device, comprising:
reception means for receiving the ML data described in a mark-up language via a communication line from a server;
ML data conversion means for converting the ML data received by said reception means into the image data in a unit of page of predetermined size;
an electronic information memory for memorizing the page information that is the image data converted by said ML data conversion means;
a touch panel for displaying the page information stored in said electronic information memory as well as inputting an operation to gain access to said page information; and
a display controller for controlling the display of the page information stored in said electronic information memory on the basis of an operation content input into said touch panel,
wherein said ML data conversion means comprises a page number appending portion for converting a link structure of said ML data into one dimensional book structure as well as appending sequentially the page number to the page information after conversion, and
said display controller comprises an event driven display control portion for selecting the page information of a page having a smaller page number or a larger page number than that of a page being displayed at present on said touch panel as a next page to be displayed at the next time on the basis of a locus from the pointer down to up on said touch panel.
43. The page information display device according to claim 42, wherein said ML data conversion means comprises a tree structure converting portion for designating a single tree structure from the link structure of said ML data as well as converting said tree into a one-dimensional book structure by searching said tree in a predetermined search order.
44. The page information display device according to claim 43, wherein said tree structure converting portion searches the link structure of said ML data giving priority to the depth.
45. The page information display device according to claim 42, wherein said display controller comprises a tag appending portion for appending a tag indicating a page number of said page information to both end portions of said touch panel, said tag appending portion having a converted page tag display function of displaying the tag for the page having the page number appended by said page number appending portion on said touch panel.
46. A page information display device, comprising:
reception means for receiving the page information from a server;
an electronic information memory for memorizing the page information being received by said reception means;
a touch panel for displaying the page information stored in said electronic information memory as well as inputting an operation to gain access to said page information; and
a display controller for controlling the display of the page information stored in said electronic information memory on the basis of an operation content input into said touch panel,
wherein said display controller comprises a tag appending portion for displaying a tag indicating the content of the page information stored in said electronic information memory on said touch panel; and
a streaming time dynamic tag appending control portion for operating said tag appending portion as the page information is being received by said reception means.
47. A page information display device, comprising:
reception means for receiving the page information having a predetermined total number of pages from a server;
an electronic information memory for memorizing the page information being received by said reception means;
a touch panel for displaying the page information stored in said electronic information memory as well as inputting an operation to gain access to said page information; and
a display controller for controlling the display of the page information stored in said electronic information memory on the basis of an operation content input into said touch panel,
wherein said display controller comprises a tag appending portion for displaying the tags indicating the contents of the page information stored in said electronic information memory on said touch panel, the number of said tags corresponding to said total number of pages; and
a streaming time dynamic tag coloring control portion for coloring a tag which has been received with a different color from the tags which have not been received, as the page information is being received by said reception means.
48. A page information display device comprising:
reception means for receiving the page information from a server;
an electronic information memory for memorizing the page information being received by said reception means;
a touch panel for displaying the page information stored in said electronic information memory as well as inputting an operation to gain access to said page information; and
a display controller for controlling the display of the page information stored in said electronic information memory on the basis of an operation content input into said touch panel,
wherein said display controller comprises a tag appending portion for displaying a tag indicating the content of the page information stored in said electronic information memory on said touch panel; and
a streaming time dynamic tag length control portion for enabling said tag appending portion to create a tag having a length corresponding to the amount of information already received in one page of the page information as the page information is being received by said reception means.
US10/734,673 2000-03-21 2003-12-15 Page information display method and device and storage medium storing program for displaying page information Abandoned US20040125081A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US10/734,673 US20040125081A1 (en) 2000-03-21 2003-12-15 Page information display method and device and storage medium storing program for displaying page information

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2000-078220 2000-03-21
JP2000078220A JP2001265481A (en) 2000-03-21 2000-03-21 Method and device for displaying page information and storage medium with program for displaying page information stored
US09/811,659 US6765559B2 (en) 2000-03-21 2001-03-20 Page information display method and device and storage medium storing program for displaying page information
US10/734,673 US20040125081A1 (en) 2000-03-21 2003-12-15 Page information display method and device and storage medium storing program for displaying page information

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US09/811,659 Division US6765559B2 (en) 2000-03-21 2001-03-20 Page information display method and device and storage medium storing program for displaying page information

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20040125081A1 true US20040125081A1 (en) 2004-07-01

Family

ID=18595662

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US09/811,659 Expired - Lifetime US6765559B2 (en) 2000-03-21 2001-03-20 Page information display method and device and storage medium storing program for displaying page information
US10/734,673 Abandoned US20040125081A1 (en) 2000-03-21 2003-12-15 Page information display method and device and storage medium storing program for displaying page information

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US09/811,659 Expired - Lifetime US6765559B2 (en) 2000-03-21 2001-03-20 Page information display method and device and storage medium storing program for displaying page information

Country Status (2)

Country Link
US (2) US6765559B2 (en)
JP (1) JP2001265481A (en)

Cited By (56)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20040051702A1 (en) * 2001-06-01 2004-03-18 Seiko Epson Corporation Display control system, display service providing system ,display control program, and display control method
US20050093817A1 (en) * 2003-11-03 2005-05-05 Pagan William G. Apparatus method and system for improved feedback of pointing device event processing
US20060050059A1 (en) * 2002-12-12 2006-03-09 Kimiyasu Satoh Input device, portable electronic apparatus, remote control device, and piezoelectric actuator driving controlling method in input device
US20070263514A1 (en) * 2004-08-30 2007-11-15 Yoshiaki Iwata Recorder
US20080226199A1 (en) * 2007-03-16 2008-09-18 Apple Inc. Parameter setting superimposed upon an image
US20080229232A1 (en) * 2007-03-16 2008-09-18 Apple Inc. Full screen editing of visual media
US20090083070A1 (en) * 2007-09-24 2009-03-26 Medtronic, Inc. Therapy adjustment based on patient event indication
EP2043341A1 (en) * 2007-09-28 2009-04-01 Lg Electronics Inc. Mobile terminal and method of controlling the mobile terminal
US20090237367A1 (en) * 2008-03-20 2009-09-24 Lg Electronics Inc. Electronic document reproduction apparatus and reproducing method thereof
US20090259968A1 (en) * 2008-04-15 2009-10-15 Htc Corporation Method for switching wallpaper in screen lock state, mobile electronic device thereof, and storage medium thereof
US20100020371A1 (en) * 2008-07-24 2010-01-28 Flexmedia Electronics Corp. Digital photo album, display method thereof and controller using the display method
US20100085310A1 (en) * 2008-10-02 2010-04-08 Donald Edward Becker Method and interface device for operating a security system
US20100141605A1 (en) * 2008-12-08 2010-06-10 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Flexible display device and data displaying method thereof
US20100241988A1 (en) * 2006-01-30 2010-09-23 Steeb Iii Raymond H Portable dataport device and method for retrieving, inter-relating, annotating and managing electronic documents at a point of need
US20110029913A1 (en) * 2005-11-12 2011-02-03 Marc Boillot Navigation System and User Interface For Directing a Control Action
US20110126097A1 (en) * 2008-07-17 2011-05-26 Nec Corporation Information processing apparatus, storage medium having program recorded thereon, and object movement method
US20110167384A1 (en) * 2009-05-19 2011-07-07 Hiroshi Yabu Content display device and content display method
CN102279706A (en) * 2011-08-03 2011-12-14 惠州Tcl移动通信有限公司 Electronic equipment and method for turning pages in display interface of electronic equipment
US20120005585A1 (en) * 2010-07-02 2012-01-05 Yum Kyungchun User-widget-based transaction system
US20120038680A1 (en) * 2009-02-02 2012-02-16 Nec Corporation Information display device, moving distance display method and moving distance display program
US20120089938A1 (en) * 2010-10-08 2012-04-12 Fuminori Homma Information Processing Apparatus, Information Processing Method, and Program
CN102446068A (en) * 2010-10-01 2012-05-09 三星电子株式会社 Apparatus and method for turning e-book pages in portable terminal
US20120192118A1 (en) * 2011-01-24 2012-07-26 Migos Charles J Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Navigating through an Electronic Document
US8239784B2 (en) 2004-07-30 2012-08-07 Apple Inc. Mode-based graphical user interfaces for touch sensitive input devices
CN102681776A (en) * 2006-09-06 2012-09-19 苹果公司 Portable electonic device performing similar oprations for different gestures
US8381135B2 (en) 2004-07-30 2013-02-19 Apple Inc. Proximity detector in handheld device
US20130067366A1 (en) * 2011-09-14 2013-03-14 Microsoft Corporation Establishing content navigation direction based on directional user gestures
CN103197871A (en) * 2012-01-09 2013-07-10 联想(北京)有限公司 Page jump method and equipment
WO2013129858A1 (en) * 2012-03-02 2013-09-06 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method for displaying pages of e-book and mobile device adapted thereto
US8638311B2 (en) * 2008-12-08 2014-01-28 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Display device and data displaying method thereof
WO2014185586A1 (en) 2013-05-16 2014-11-20 Lg Electronics Inc. Portable device and control method thereof
US20150068819A1 (en) * 2013-09-11 2015-03-12 Debra L. Dyer Food product scale
US9016964B2 (en) 2012-09-13 2015-04-28 Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha Printer with touch panel for receiving contact trajectory pattern for producing a print
US20150169100A1 (en) * 2012-08-30 2015-06-18 Fujitsu Limited Display device and computer readable recording medium stored a program
US20150296034A1 (en) * 2014-04-09 2015-10-15 Fujitsu Limited Read determination device, read determination method, and read determination program
US9239677B2 (en) 2004-05-06 2016-01-19 Apple Inc. Operation of a computer with touch screen interface
US9239673B2 (en) 1998-01-26 2016-01-19 Apple Inc. Gesturing with a multipoint sensing device
US20160026694A1 (en) * 2014-07-28 2016-01-28 Baidu Online Network Technology (Beijing) Co., Ltd Method and apparatus for providing search result
US9292111B2 (en) 1998-01-26 2016-03-22 Apple Inc. Gesturing with a multipoint sensing device
US9372600B2 (en) 2010-10-20 2016-06-21 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Screen display method and apparatus of a mobile terminal
US9678572B2 (en) 2010-10-01 2017-06-13 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for turning e-book pages in portable terminal
US9690446B2 (en) 2006-09-06 2017-06-27 Apple Inc. Portable electronic device, method, and graphical user interface for displaying structured electronic documents
CN108520440A (en) * 2018-03-30 2018-09-11 掌阅科技股份有限公司 Determination method, electronic equipment and the computer storage media of e-book consumption demand
US10073595B2 (en) 2010-10-01 2018-09-11 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for turning E-book pages in portable terminal
US10261630B2 (en) 2012-04-27 2019-04-16 Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America Input device, input support method, and program
CN110673902A (en) * 2018-07-02 2020-01-10 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 Page display method and device and storage medium
US10637986B2 (en) 2016-06-10 2020-04-28 Apple Inc. Displaying and updating a set of application views
US10739974B2 (en) 2016-06-11 2020-08-11 Apple Inc. Configuring context-specific user interfaces
US10921976B2 (en) 2013-09-03 2021-02-16 Apple Inc. User interface for manipulating user interface objects
US11023122B2 (en) 2006-09-06 2021-06-01 Apple Inc. Video manager for portable multifunction device
US11157135B2 (en) 2014-09-02 2021-10-26 Apple Inc. Multi-dimensional object rearrangement
US20210374327A1 (en) * 2011-05-17 2021-12-02 Apple Inc. Content rendition generation and control
US11360634B1 (en) 2021-05-15 2022-06-14 Apple Inc. Shared-content session user interfaces
US11402968B2 (en) 2014-09-02 2022-08-02 Apple Inc. Reduced size user in interface
US11907605B2 (en) 2021-05-15 2024-02-20 Apple Inc. Shared-content session user interfaces
US11907013B2 (en) 2014-05-30 2024-02-20 Apple Inc. Continuity of applications across devices

Families Citing this family (235)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6337698B1 (en) * 1998-11-20 2002-01-08 Microsoft Corporation Pen-based interface for a notepad computer
US7191394B1 (en) 2000-06-21 2007-03-13 Microsoft Corporation Authoring arbitrary XML documents using DHTML and XSLT
US7346848B1 (en) 2000-06-21 2008-03-18 Microsoft Corporation Single window navigation methods and systems
US6883168B1 (en) 2000-06-21 2005-04-19 Microsoft Corporation Methods, systems, architectures and data structures for delivering software via a network
US7624356B1 (en) 2000-06-21 2009-11-24 Microsoft Corporation Task-sensitive methods and systems for displaying command sets
US7155667B1 (en) 2000-06-21 2006-12-26 Microsoft Corporation User interface for integrated spreadsheets and word processing tables
US7117435B1 (en) 2000-06-21 2006-10-03 Microsoft Corporation Spreadsheet fields in text
US7000230B1 (en) 2000-06-21 2006-02-14 Microsoft Corporation Network-based software extensions
US6948135B1 (en) 2000-06-21 2005-09-20 Microsoft Corporation Method and systems of providing information to computer users
US7107279B2 (en) * 2000-12-20 2006-09-12 Insitech Group, Inc. Rapid development in a distributed application environment
US7392287B2 (en) * 2001-03-27 2008-06-24 Hemisphere Ii Investment Lp Method and apparatus for sharing information using a handheld device
TW501072B (en) * 2001-05-09 2002-09-01 Ulead Systems Inc Visualization process method of image file and image editor having visualization process function and the readable storage medium of computer to store program
US6943773B2 (en) * 2001-05-11 2005-09-13 Palmone, Inc. Page flicking mechanism for electronic display devices that paginate content
US20020176628A1 (en) * 2001-05-22 2002-11-28 Starkweather Gary K. Document imaging and indexing system
US8095879B2 (en) * 2002-12-10 2012-01-10 Neonode Inc. User interface for mobile handheld computer unit
US9164654B2 (en) * 2002-12-10 2015-10-20 Neonode Inc. User interface for mobile computer unit
US7296243B2 (en) 2002-03-19 2007-11-13 Aol Llc Animating display motion
US7549131B2 (en) * 2002-12-31 2009-06-16 Apple Inc. Method of controlling movement of a cursor on a screen and a computer readable medium containing such a method as a program code
US7415672B1 (en) 2003-03-24 2008-08-19 Microsoft Corporation System and method for designing electronic forms
US7370066B1 (en) 2003-03-24 2008-05-06 Microsoft Corporation System and method for offline editing of data files
US7913159B2 (en) 2003-03-28 2011-03-22 Microsoft Corporation System and method for real-time validation of structured data files
US7296017B2 (en) 2003-03-28 2007-11-13 Microsoft Corporation Validation of XML data files
US7516145B2 (en) * 2003-03-31 2009-04-07 Microsoft Corporation System and method for incrementally transforming and rendering hierarchical data files
US7451392B1 (en) 2003-06-30 2008-11-11 Microsoft Corporation Rendering an HTML electronic form by applying XSLT to XML using a solution
US7406660B1 (en) 2003-08-01 2008-07-29 Microsoft Corporation Mapping between structured data and a visual surface
US7334187B1 (en) 2003-08-06 2008-02-19 Microsoft Corporation Electronic form aggregation
US8046701B2 (en) 2003-08-07 2011-10-25 Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. Peer to peer gesture based modular presentation system
US20050146750A1 (en) * 2003-12-24 2005-07-07 Moroney Brian W. Apparatus, system, and method for printing on variable form media
US8819072B1 (en) 2004-02-02 2014-08-26 Microsoft Corporation Promoting data from structured data files
US7496837B1 (en) 2004-04-29 2009-02-24 Microsoft Corporation Structural editing with schema awareness
US7281018B1 (en) 2004-05-26 2007-10-09 Microsoft Corporation Form template data source change
US7774620B1 (en) 2004-05-27 2010-08-10 Microsoft Corporation Executing applications at appropriate trust levels
JP4855654B2 (en) 2004-05-31 2012-01-18 ソニー株式会社 On-vehicle device, on-vehicle device information providing method, on-vehicle device information providing method program, and on-vehicle device information providing method program
US8068103B2 (en) * 2004-06-24 2011-11-29 Apple Inc. User-interface design
JP4351599B2 (en) * 2004-09-03 2009-10-28 パナソニック株式会社 Input device
US7692636B2 (en) 2004-09-30 2010-04-06 Microsoft Corporation Systems and methods for handwriting to a screen
US8487879B2 (en) 2004-10-29 2013-07-16 Microsoft Corporation Systems and methods for interacting with a computer through handwriting to a screen
US20060098673A1 (en) * 2004-11-09 2006-05-11 Alcatel Input queue packet switch architecture and queue service discipline
US7712022B2 (en) 2004-11-15 2010-05-04 Microsoft Corporation Mutually exclusive options in electronic forms
US7721190B2 (en) 2004-11-16 2010-05-18 Microsoft Corporation Methods and systems for server side form processing
US7904801B2 (en) 2004-12-15 2011-03-08 Microsoft Corporation Recursive sections in electronic forms
US7898541B2 (en) * 2004-12-17 2011-03-01 Palo Alto Research Center Incorporated Systems and methods for turning pages in a three-dimensional electronic document
US7683889B2 (en) * 2004-12-21 2010-03-23 Microsoft Corporation Pressure based selection
US7619616B2 (en) 2004-12-21 2009-11-17 Microsoft Corporation Pressure sensitive controls
US7629966B2 (en) * 2004-12-21 2009-12-08 Microsoft Corporation Hard tap
US7937651B2 (en) 2005-01-14 2011-05-03 Microsoft Corporation Structural editing operations for network forms
US8819569B2 (en) * 2005-02-18 2014-08-26 Zumobi, Inc Single-handed approach for navigation of application tiles using panning and zooming
US7725834B2 (en) 2005-03-04 2010-05-25 Microsoft Corporation Designer-created aspect for an electronic form template
US8010515B2 (en) 2005-04-15 2011-08-30 Microsoft Corporation Query to an electronic form
US8370639B2 (en) * 2005-06-16 2013-02-05 Sensible Vision, Inc. System and method for providing secure access to an electronic device using continuous facial biometrics
US8200975B2 (en) 2005-06-29 2012-06-12 Microsoft Corporation Digital signatures for network forms
JP4551830B2 (en) * 2005-07-08 2010-09-29 任天堂株式会社 Pointing device input adjustment program and input adjustment device
JP4704288B2 (en) * 2005-09-15 2011-06-15 株式会社リコー Image processing apparatus and program
US7636071B2 (en) 2005-11-30 2009-12-22 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Providing information in a multi-screen device
US8001459B2 (en) 2005-12-05 2011-08-16 Microsoft Corporation Enabling electronic documents for limited-capability computing devices
US7509588B2 (en) 2005-12-30 2009-03-24 Apple Inc. Portable electronic device with interface reconfiguration mode
US7779343B2 (en) 2006-01-30 2010-08-17 Microsoft Corporation Opening network-enabled electronic documents
JP5030622B2 (en) * 2006-03-16 2012-09-19 株式会社リコー Image processing apparatus and preview display method
US8930834B2 (en) 2006-03-20 2015-01-06 Microsoft Corporation Variable orientation user interface
US9274807B2 (en) 2006-04-20 2016-03-01 Qualcomm Incorporated Selective hibernation of activities in an electronic device
US8683362B2 (en) 2008-05-23 2014-03-25 Qualcomm Incorporated Card metaphor for activities in a computing device
US8296684B2 (en) 2008-05-23 2012-10-23 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Navigating among activities in a computing device
US20080040692A1 (en) * 2006-06-29 2008-02-14 Microsoft Corporation Gesture input
JP4793787B2 (en) * 2006-07-04 2011-10-12 アルパイン株式会社 Display control device
JP4961875B2 (en) * 2006-07-21 2012-06-27 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Document management apparatus, document management method, and program
US7940250B2 (en) 2006-09-06 2011-05-10 Apple Inc. Web-clip widgets on a portable multifunction device
CN101356493A (en) * 2006-09-06 2009-01-28 苹果公司 Portable electronic device for photo management
US9304675B2 (en) 2006-09-06 2016-04-05 Apple Inc. Portable electronic device for instant messaging
US8564544B2 (en) 2006-09-06 2013-10-22 Apple Inc. Touch screen device, method, and graphical user interface for customizing display of content category icons
US8106856B2 (en) * 2006-09-06 2012-01-31 Apple Inc. Portable electronic device for photo management
AU2012100655B4 (en) * 2006-09-06 2013-01-24 Apple Inc. Touch screen device, method, and graphical user interface for determining commands by applying heuristics
US10313505B2 (en) * 2006-09-06 2019-06-04 Apple Inc. Portable multifunction device, method, and graphical user interface for configuring and displaying widgets
JP5371222B2 (en) * 2006-09-14 2013-12-18 オプティスカン・ピーティーワイ・リミテッド Optical fiber scanner
JP2008152362A (en) 2006-12-14 2008-07-03 Konami Digital Entertainment:Kk Game program, game device and game control method
US8689132B2 (en) 2007-01-07 2014-04-01 Apple Inc. Portable electronic device, method, and graphical user interface for displaying electronic documents and lists
US8519964B2 (en) 2007-01-07 2013-08-27 Apple Inc. Portable multifunction device, method, and graphical user interface supporting user navigations of graphical objects on a touch screen display
US8788954B2 (en) 2007-01-07 2014-07-22 Apple Inc. Web-clip widgets on a portable multifunction device
US20080235626A1 (en) * 2007-03-22 2008-09-25 Arinc Incorporated Electronic paper device for use by aircraft and railway passengers
US8914786B2 (en) 2007-03-23 2014-12-16 Zumobi, Inc. Systems and methods for controlling application updates across a wireless interface
US20080294274A1 (en) * 2007-05-22 2008-11-27 Honeywell International Inc. Special purpose controller interface with breadcrumb navigation support
US9933937B2 (en) 2007-06-20 2018-04-03 Apple Inc. Portable multifunction device, method, and graphical user interface for playing online videos
US9772751B2 (en) 2007-06-29 2017-09-26 Apple Inc. Using gestures to slide between user interfaces
US9619143B2 (en) 2008-01-06 2017-04-11 Apple Inc. Device, method, and graphical user interface for viewing application launch icons
US8619038B2 (en) * 2007-09-04 2013-12-31 Apple Inc. Editing interface
US11126321B2 (en) 2007-09-04 2021-09-21 Apple Inc. Application menu user interface
US20090235162A1 (en) * 2008-03-11 2009-09-17 Disney Enterprises, Inc. Method and system for providing enhanced virtual books
US9152258B2 (en) 2008-06-19 2015-10-06 Neonode Inc. User interface for a touch screen
US20100088746A1 (en) * 2008-10-08 2010-04-08 Sony Corporation Secure ebook techniques
US8584031B2 (en) 2008-11-19 2013-11-12 Apple Inc. Portable touch screen device, method, and graphical user interface for using emoji characters
KR101527386B1 (en) * 2008-12-08 2015-06-10 삼성전자 주식회사 Display apparatus and control method of the same
US8453057B2 (en) * 2008-12-22 2013-05-28 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Stage interaction for mobile device
JP5455364B2 (en) * 2008-12-26 2014-03-26 キヤノン株式会社 Information processing apparatus and locus data recognition method
JP5108747B2 (en) * 2008-12-26 2012-12-26 富士フイルム株式会社 Information display apparatus, method and program
US8291348B2 (en) * 2008-12-31 2012-10-16 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Computing device and method for selecting display regions responsive to non-discrete directional input actions and intelligent content analysis
US8499251B2 (en) * 2009-01-07 2013-07-30 Microsoft Corporation Virtual page turn
KR101479350B1 (en) * 2009-05-15 2015-01-05 주식회사 엘지유플러스 Method and system for shifting page using touch flicking
KR101646922B1 (en) 2009-05-19 2016-08-23 삼성전자 주식회사 Operation Method of associated with a communication function And Portable Device supporting the same
EP2449453B1 (en) * 2009-06-29 2019-08-07 Nokia Technologies Oy Method and apparatus for displaying content
US8769442B2 (en) * 2009-07-07 2014-07-01 Microsoft Corporation System and method for allocating digital graffiti objects and canvasses
JP5304509B2 (en) * 2009-07-23 2013-10-02 コニカミノルタ株式会社 Authentication method, authentication apparatus, and authentication processing program
US20110039602A1 (en) * 2009-08-13 2011-02-17 Mcnamara Justin Methods And Systems For Interacting With Content On A Mobile Device
JP5593655B2 (en) * 2009-08-31 2014-09-24 ソニー株式会社 Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program
KR20110028834A (en) 2009-09-14 2011-03-22 삼성전자주식회사 Method and apparatus for providing user interface using touch pressure on touch screen of mobile station
JP5509757B2 (en) * 2009-09-17 2014-06-04 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Information processing apparatus, display control method, and program
WO2011037558A1 (en) 2009-09-22 2011-03-31 Apple Inc. Device, method, and graphical user interface for manipulating user interface objects
US8780069B2 (en) 2009-09-25 2014-07-15 Apple Inc. Device, method, and graphical user interface for manipulating user interface objects
JP5361697B2 (en) * 2009-12-21 2013-12-04 キヤノン株式会社 Display control apparatus and display control method
US8736561B2 (en) 2010-01-06 2014-05-27 Apple Inc. Device, method, and graphical user interface with content display modes and display rotation heuristics
US8698762B2 (en) 2010-01-06 2014-04-15 Apple Inc. Device, method, and graphical user interface for navigating and displaying content in context
US10007393B2 (en) * 2010-01-19 2018-06-26 Apple Inc. 3D view of file structure
KR101319264B1 (en) * 2010-01-22 2013-10-18 전자부품연구원 Method for providing UI according to multi touch pressure and electronic device using the same
JP5365537B2 (en) * 2010-02-02 2013-12-11 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Information processing apparatus and information processing program
US10788976B2 (en) 2010-04-07 2020-09-29 Apple Inc. Device, method, and graphical user interface for managing folders with multiple pages
US8458615B2 (en) 2010-04-07 2013-06-04 Apple Inc. Device, method, and graphical user interface for managing folders
KR101626301B1 (en) * 2010-05-28 2016-06-01 엘지전자 주식회사 Electronic device and operation control method thereof
JP5095780B2 (en) * 2010-06-25 2012-12-12 シャープ株式会社 Image forming apparatus
US9223475B1 (en) 2010-06-30 2015-12-29 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Bookmark navigation user interface
US9367227B1 (en) * 2010-06-30 2016-06-14 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Chapter navigation user interface
KR101764751B1 (en) * 2010-07-12 2017-08-03 엘지전자 주식회사 Mobile terminal and control method therof
KR101701932B1 (en) * 2010-07-22 2017-02-13 삼성전자 주식회사 Input device and control method of thereof
US9395907B2 (en) 2010-08-20 2016-07-19 Nokia Technologies Oy Method and apparatus for adapting a content package comprising a first content segment from a first content source to display a second content segment from a second content source
KR101691832B1 (en) * 2010-08-31 2017-01-02 엘지전자 주식회사 Mobile terminal and e-book quick look display method using it
CN102455846A (en) * 2010-10-15 2012-05-16 国际商业机器公司 Method and device for processing equipment with bistable display
CN101976169B (en) * 2010-10-22 2012-11-21 鸿富锦精密工业(深圳)有限公司 Electronic reading device and page turning method thereof
KR20120062037A (en) * 2010-10-25 2012-06-14 삼성전자주식회사 Method for changing page in e-book reader
CA2743154A1 (en) * 2010-12-16 2012-06-16 Exopc Method for simulating a page turn in an electronic document
JP2012141780A (en) * 2010-12-28 2012-07-26 Ricoh Co Ltd Electronic information terminal and electronic information system
JP5722028B2 (en) * 2010-12-29 2015-05-20 シャープ株式会社 Content display device and content display program
WO2012108213A1 (en) * 2011-02-10 2012-08-16 京セラ株式会社 Input device
JP5774899B2 (en) * 2011-04-26 2015-09-09 京セラ株式会社 Portable terminal device, program, and display control method
JP5785786B2 (en) * 2011-06-06 2015-09-30 オリンパス株式会社 Imaging apparatus, display method, and program
US9417754B2 (en) 2011-08-05 2016-08-16 P4tents1, LLC User interface system, method, and computer program product
KR101943987B1 (en) * 2011-12-06 2019-04-17 삼성전자주식회사 System and method for sharing page by device
WO2013084560A1 (en) * 2011-12-07 2013-06-13 インターナショナル・ビジネス・マシーンズ・コーポレーション Method of displaying electronic document, and apparatus and computer program therefor
EP2793113A4 (en) 2011-12-15 2015-07-22 Ntt Docomo Inc Display device, user interface method and program
US8966391B2 (en) * 2012-03-21 2015-02-24 International Business Machines Corporation Force-based contextualizing of multiple pages for electronic book reader
US20130257792A1 (en) 2012-04-02 2013-10-03 Synaptics Incorporated Systems and methods for determining user input using position information and force sensing
KR101895818B1 (en) * 2012-04-10 2018-09-10 삼성전자 주식회사 Method and apparatus for providing feedback associated with e-book in terminal
JP5704655B2 (en) 2012-04-12 2015-04-22 株式会社Nttドコモ Display device and program
JP6022807B2 (en) * 2012-04-26 2016-11-09 任天堂株式会社 Information processing program, information processing apparatus, information processing system, and information processing control method
JP2013228937A (en) * 2012-04-26 2013-11-07 Kyocera Corp Electronic apparatus and control method of electronic apparatus
AU2013202944B2 (en) 2012-04-26 2015-11-12 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and terminal for displaying a plurality of pages, method and terminal for displaying a plurality of applications being executed on terminal, and method of executing a plurality of applications
JP5461735B2 (en) * 2012-04-27 2014-04-02 パナソニック株式会社 Input device, input support method, and program
CN107728906B (en) 2012-05-09 2020-07-31 苹果公司 Device, method and graphical user interface for moving and placing user interface objects
JP6082458B2 (en) 2012-05-09 2017-02-15 アップル インコーポレイテッド Device, method, and graphical user interface for providing tactile feedback of actions performed within a user interface
EP3401773A1 (en) 2012-05-09 2018-11-14 Apple Inc. Device, method, and graphical user interface for displaying additional information in response to a user contact
WO2013169865A2 (en) 2012-05-09 2013-11-14 Yknots Industries Llc Device, method, and graphical user interface for moving a user interface object based on an intensity of a press input
WO2013169845A1 (en) 2012-05-09 2013-11-14 Yknots Industries Llc Device, method, and graphical user interface for scrolling nested regions
JP6182207B2 (en) 2012-05-09 2017-08-16 アップル インコーポレイテッド Device, method, and graphical user interface for providing feedback for changing an activation state of a user interface object
WO2013169842A2 (en) 2012-05-09 2013-11-14 Yknots Industries Llc Device, method, and graphical user interface for selecting object within a group of objects
AU2013259637B2 (en) 2012-05-09 2016-07-07 Apple Inc. Device, method, and graphical user interface for selecting user interface objects
WO2013169843A1 (en) 2012-05-09 2013-11-14 Yknots Industries Llc Device, method, and graphical user interface for manipulating framed graphical objects
WO2013169849A2 (en) 2012-05-09 2013-11-14 Industries Llc Yknots Device, method, and graphical user interface for displaying user interface objects corresponding to an application
WO2013169851A2 (en) 2012-05-09 2013-11-14 Yknots Industries Llc Device, method, and graphical user interface for facilitating user interaction with controls in a user interface
WO2013169875A2 (en) 2012-05-09 2013-11-14 Yknots Industries Llc Device, method, and graphical user interface for displaying content associated with a corresponding affordance
JP6002836B2 (en) 2012-05-09 2016-10-05 アップル インコーポレイテッド Device, method, and graphical user interface for transitioning between display states in response to a gesture
JP6133554B2 (en) * 2012-06-25 2017-05-24 京セラ株式会社 Electronic apparatus, apparatus and method
US9098516B2 (en) * 2012-07-18 2015-08-04 DS Zodiac, Inc. Multi-dimensional file system
EP2889745A4 (en) * 2012-08-22 2016-07-06 Nec Corp Electronic apparatus, document display method, and computer-readable recording medium whereupon program is recorded
HK1169272A2 (en) * 2012-09-19 2013-01-18 Sky88 Technology Ltd A virtual 3d paper
JP6080461B2 (en) 2012-10-01 2017-02-15 キヤノン株式会社 Operation receiving apparatus and method, and program
JP6085448B2 (en) * 2012-10-19 2017-02-22 エヌ・ティ・ティ・コミュニケーションズ株式会社 Content image display device, content image display method, and content image display program
WO2014069917A1 (en) * 2012-10-31 2014-05-08 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Display apparatus and method thereof
US20140164892A1 (en) * 2012-12-11 2014-06-12 Microsoft Corporation Consuming content incrementally
CN104885050B (en) 2012-12-29 2017-12-08 苹果公司 For determining the equipment, method and the graphic user interface that are rolling or selection content
WO2014105279A1 (en) 2012-12-29 2014-07-03 Yknots Industries Llc Device, method, and graphical user interface for switching between user interfaces
AU2013368441B2 (en) 2012-12-29 2016-04-14 Apple Inc. Device, method, and graphical user interface for forgoing generation of tactile output for a multi-contact gesture
WO2014105277A2 (en) 2012-12-29 2014-07-03 Yknots Industries Llc Device, method, and graphical user interface for moving a cursor according to a change in an appearance of a control icon with simulated three-dimensional characteristics
CN104903834B (en) 2012-12-29 2019-07-05 苹果公司 For equipment, method and the graphic user interface in touch input to transition between display output relation
CN109375853A (en) 2012-12-29 2019-02-22 苹果公司 To equipment, method and the graphic user interface of the navigation of user interface hierarchical structure
US9600103B1 (en) * 2012-12-31 2017-03-21 Allscripts Software, Llc Method for ensuring use intentions of a touch screen device
JP5991538B2 (en) 2013-02-20 2016-09-14 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Data processing apparatus, data processing system, and program
KR20150002358A (en) * 2013-06-28 2015-01-07 삼성전자주식회사 Method and electronic device for displaying e-book
KR20150025635A (en) * 2013-08-29 2015-03-11 삼성전자주식회사 Electronic device and method for controlling screen
KR101952928B1 (en) 2013-10-30 2019-02-27 애플 인크. Displaying relevant user interface objects
US10067651B2 (en) * 2013-11-15 2018-09-04 Thomson Reuters Global Resources Unlimited Company Navigable layering of viewable areas for hierarchical content
USD753705S1 (en) * 2013-11-21 2016-04-12 Microsoft Corporation Display screen with animated graphical user interface
US9575651B2 (en) * 2013-12-30 2017-02-21 Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. Touchscreen selection of graphical objects
JP5735146B1 (en) 2014-01-31 2015-06-17 グリー株式会社 Display data creation method, control program, and computer
JP6464576B2 (en) * 2014-06-04 2019-02-06 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Information processing apparatus and information processing program
US9977566B2 (en) * 2014-06-24 2018-05-22 Google Llc Computerized systems and methods for rendering an animation of an object in response to user input
CN105573998A (en) * 2014-10-09 2016-05-11 阿里巴巴集团控股有限公司 Page operation information maintenance method and server
US9921722B2 (en) * 2014-10-30 2018-03-20 Rakuten Kobo, Inc. Page transition system and method for alternate gesture mode and invocation thereof
US20160179311A1 (en) * 2014-12-18 2016-06-23 Kobo Incorporated Method and system for e-book start-reading interface
US20170371438A1 (en) * 2014-12-21 2017-12-28 Luidia Global Co., Ltd Method and system for transcribing marker locations, including erasures
US10048757B2 (en) 2015-03-08 2018-08-14 Apple Inc. Devices and methods for controlling media presentation
US9632664B2 (en) 2015-03-08 2017-04-25 Apple Inc. Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for manipulating user interface objects with visual and/or haptic feedback
US9990107B2 (en) 2015-03-08 2018-06-05 Apple Inc. Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for displaying and using menus
US10095396B2 (en) 2015-03-08 2018-10-09 Apple Inc. Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for interacting with a control object while dragging another object
US9645732B2 (en) 2015-03-08 2017-05-09 Apple Inc. Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for displaying and using menus
US9785305B2 (en) 2015-03-19 2017-10-10 Apple Inc. Touch input cursor manipulation
US9639184B2 (en) 2015-03-19 2017-05-02 Apple Inc. Touch input cursor manipulation
WO2016151919A1 (en) * 2015-03-26 2016-09-29 株式会社ミスミグループ本社 Browsing assistance method for electronic book, and browsing assistance program
US10152208B2 (en) 2015-04-01 2018-12-11 Apple Inc. Devices and methods for processing touch inputs based on their intensities
US20170045981A1 (en) 2015-08-10 2017-02-16 Apple Inc. Devices and Methods for Processing Touch Inputs Based on Their Intensities
US9830048B2 (en) 2015-06-07 2017-11-28 Apple Inc. Devices and methods for processing touch inputs with instructions in a web page
US9860451B2 (en) 2015-06-07 2018-01-02 Apple Inc. Devices and methods for capturing and interacting with enhanced digital images
US10346030B2 (en) 2015-06-07 2019-07-09 Apple Inc. Devices and methods for navigating between user interfaces
US10200598B2 (en) 2015-06-07 2019-02-05 Apple Inc. Devices and methods for capturing and interacting with enhanced digital images
US9891811B2 (en) 2015-06-07 2018-02-13 Apple Inc. Devices and methods for navigating between user interfaces
JP6638220B2 (en) * 2015-06-17 2020-01-29 富士通株式会社 Web access program, web access method and web access device
JP5931256B2 (en) * 2015-07-01 2016-06-08 京セラ株式会社 Portable terminal device, program, and display control method
CN105045593B (en) * 2015-07-29 2019-05-10 百度在线网络技术(北京)有限公司 Method and apparatus for drawing the page
US10235035B2 (en) 2015-08-10 2019-03-19 Apple Inc. Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for content navigation and manipulation
US10416800B2 (en) 2015-08-10 2019-09-17 Apple Inc. Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for adjusting user interface objects
US9880735B2 (en) 2015-08-10 2018-01-30 Apple Inc. Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for manipulating user interface objects with visual and/or haptic feedback
US10248308B2 (en) 2015-08-10 2019-04-02 Apple Inc. Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for manipulating user interfaces with physical gestures
JP6500180B2 (en) * 2015-08-20 2019-04-17 株式会社Joled Image processing apparatus, display apparatus and electronic device
US20170068374A1 (en) * 2015-09-09 2017-03-09 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Changing an interaction layer on a graphical user interface
US9652069B1 (en) 2015-10-22 2017-05-16 Synaptics Incorporated Press hard and move gesture
JP6363054B2 (en) * 2015-10-26 2018-07-25 グリー株式会社 Display data creation method, control program, and computer
US10430053B1 (en) * 2016-01-05 2019-10-01 Quirklogic, Inc. Edge navigation mechanism that mimics the use of a flipchart
AU2017100670C4 (en) 2016-06-12 2019-11-21 Apple Inc. User interfaces for retrieving contextually relevant media content
US11816325B2 (en) 2016-06-12 2023-11-14 Apple Inc. Application shortcuts for carplay
DK201670608A1 (en) 2016-06-12 2018-01-02 Apple Inc User interfaces for retrieving contextually relevant media content
US20170357672A1 (en) 2016-06-12 2017-12-14 Apple Inc. Relating digital assets using notable moments
CN108664454B (en) * 2017-03-30 2020-09-11 掌阅科技股份有限公司 Electronic book page display method and device and terminal equipment
KR101828298B1 (en) * 2017-04-10 2018-02-12 삼성전자 주식회사 Method and apparatus for displaying screen in mobile terminal
WO2019043948A1 (en) * 2017-09-04 2019-03-07 楽天株式会社 Information processing device, information processing method, program, and storage medium
US11243996B2 (en) 2018-05-07 2022-02-08 Apple Inc. Digital asset search user interface
DK180171B1 (en) 2018-05-07 2020-07-14 Apple Inc USER INTERFACES FOR SHARING CONTEXTUALLY RELEVANT MEDIA CONTENT
US11086935B2 (en) 2018-05-07 2021-08-10 Apple Inc. Smart updates from historical database changes
US10803135B2 (en) 2018-09-11 2020-10-13 Apple Inc. Techniques for disambiguating clustered occurrence identifiers
US10846343B2 (en) 2018-09-11 2020-11-24 Apple Inc. Techniques for disambiguating clustered location identifiers
JP6824323B2 (en) * 2019-04-22 2021-02-03 シャープ株式会社 Image forming device
US11675476B2 (en) 2019-05-05 2023-06-13 Apple Inc. User interfaces for widgets
DK201970535A1 (en) 2019-05-06 2020-12-21 Apple Inc Media browsing user interface with intelligently selected representative media items
US11194467B2 (en) 2019-06-01 2021-12-07 Apple Inc. Keyboard management user interfaces
USD922400S1 (en) * 2019-06-13 2021-06-15 Tata Consultancy Services Limited Display screen with animated graphical user interface
USD921651S1 (en) * 2019-06-17 2021-06-08 Tata Consultancy Services Limited Display screen with animated graphical user interface
USD922401S1 (en) * 2019-06-17 2021-06-15 Tata Consultancy Services Limited Display screen with animated graphical user interface
USD921650S1 (en) * 2019-06-17 2021-06-08 Tata Consultancy Services Limited Display screen with animated graphical user interface
DK181076B1 (en) 2020-02-14 2022-11-25 Apple Inc USER INTERFACES FOR TRAINING CONTENT
JP2021036480A (en) * 2020-12-07 2021-03-04 株式会社東芝 Display control device
CN113487991B (en) * 2021-06-22 2023-10-13 北京黑鸟科技有限公司 Marking method, system, device and medium for flexible paging on segment code screen

Citations (15)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5165595A (en) * 1990-10-04 1992-11-24 Nippondenso Co., Ltd. Air conditioning system for vehicles
US5289569A (en) * 1985-05-21 1994-02-22 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Document processing system capable of simultaneously displaying two continuous document pages in accordance with a selected binding position
US5392387A (en) * 1992-12-17 1995-02-21 International Business Machines Corporation Method and system for enhanced data access efficiency in an electronic book
US5463725A (en) * 1992-12-31 1995-10-31 International Business Machines Corp. Data processing system graphical user interface which emulates printed material
US5467102A (en) * 1992-08-31 1995-11-14 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Portable display device with at least two display screens controllable collectively or separately
US5663748A (en) * 1995-12-14 1997-09-02 Motorola, Inc. Electronic book having highlighting feature
US5696982A (en) * 1993-03-31 1997-12-09 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for page-retrieval using electronic-book display
US5900876A (en) * 1995-04-14 1999-05-04 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Information processing apparatus and method with display book page turning
US6225996B1 (en) * 1998-02-20 2001-05-01 Corel Corporation System and method for displaying a current value of a cell of a document
US6229502B1 (en) * 1998-11-03 2001-05-08 Cylark Development Llc Electronic book
US6278443B1 (en) * 1998-04-30 2001-08-21 International Business Machines Corporation Touch screen with random finger placement and rolling on screen to control the movement of information on-screen
US6407757B1 (en) * 1997-12-18 2002-06-18 E-Book Systems Pte Ltd. Computer-based browsing method and computer program product for displaying information in an electronic book form
US7047490B1 (en) * 1997-11-26 2006-05-16 Adobe Systems Incorporated Displaying the appearance of a printed and assembled document
US7134072B1 (en) * 1999-10-13 2006-11-07 Microsoft Corporation Methods and systems for processing XML documents
US7139982B2 (en) * 2000-12-21 2006-11-21 Xerox Corporation Navigation methods, systems, and computer program products for virtual three-dimensional books

Family Cites Families (15)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS6336426A (en) * 1986-07-31 1988-02-17 Pfu Ltd Page feed control system
JPH02144768A (en) * 1988-11-28 1990-06-04 Nec Corp Electronic filling system
JPH05165595A (en) 1991-12-12 1993-07-02 Hitachi Ltd Document management retrieval method and data processing system using the same
JPH05257991A (en) * 1992-03-16 1993-10-08 Nippon Telegr & Teleph Corp <Ntt> Information retrieval processing system
EP0595746A1 (en) * 1992-10-29 1994-05-04 International Business Machines Corporation Method and system for input device pressure indication in a data processing system
JPH06236247A (en) 1993-02-10 1994-08-23 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Index display device
JPH0784721A (en) * 1993-09-13 1995-03-31 Nippon Telegr & Teleph Corp <Ntt> Inputting device for browsing operation
JPH0816353A (en) * 1994-06-28 1996-01-19 Sharp Corp Object display enlarging method
JPH0876926A (en) * 1994-09-02 1996-03-22 Brother Ind Ltd Picture display device
JPH08286882A (en) * 1995-04-14 1996-11-01 Canon Inc Information processing unit and page turn-over method for the information processing unit
US6486895B1 (en) * 1995-09-08 2002-11-26 Xerox Corporation Display system for displaying lists of linked documents
JPH09212285A (en) * 1996-02-06 1997-08-15 Sharp Corp Handwriting input device
JP3486303B2 (en) 1996-07-24 2004-01-13 日本電信電話株式会社 Multimedia information transfer method and device
JPH10301751A (en) * 1997-04-24 1998-11-13 Canon Inc Electronic filing system and electronic filing method and storage medium
JPH11272401A (en) * 1998-03-25 1999-10-08 Hitachi Information Systems Ltd Mouse cursor control method and recording medium for storing program for realizing the same method

Patent Citations (16)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5289569A (en) * 1985-05-21 1994-02-22 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Document processing system capable of simultaneously displaying two continuous document pages in accordance with a selected binding position
US5165595A (en) * 1990-10-04 1992-11-24 Nippondenso Co., Ltd. Air conditioning system for vehicles
US5467102A (en) * 1992-08-31 1995-11-14 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Portable display device with at least two display screens controllable collectively or separately
US5392387A (en) * 1992-12-17 1995-02-21 International Business Machines Corporation Method and system for enhanced data access efficiency in an electronic book
US5463725A (en) * 1992-12-31 1995-10-31 International Business Machines Corp. Data processing system graphical user interface which emulates printed material
US5909690A (en) * 1993-03-31 1999-06-01 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for page-retrieval using electronic book display
US5696982A (en) * 1993-03-31 1997-12-09 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for page-retrieval using electronic-book display
US5900876A (en) * 1995-04-14 1999-05-04 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Information processing apparatus and method with display book page turning
US5663748A (en) * 1995-12-14 1997-09-02 Motorola, Inc. Electronic book having highlighting feature
US7047490B1 (en) * 1997-11-26 2006-05-16 Adobe Systems Incorporated Displaying the appearance of a printed and assembled document
US6407757B1 (en) * 1997-12-18 2002-06-18 E-Book Systems Pte Ltd. Computer-based browsing method and computer program product for displaying information in an electronic book form
US6225996B1 (en) * 1998-02-20 2001-05-01 Corel Corporation System and method for displaying a current value of a cell of a document
US6278443B1 (en) * 1998-04-30 2001-08-21 International Business Machines Corporation Touch screen with random finger placement and rolling on screen to control the movement of information on-screen
US6229502B1 (en) * 1998-11-03 2001-05-08 Cylark Development Llc Electronic book
US7134072B1 (en) * 1999-10-13 2006-11-07 Microsoft Corporation Methods and systems for processing XML documents
US7139982B2 (en) * 2000-12-21 2006-11-21 Xerox Corporation Navigation methods, systems, and computer program products for virtual three-dimensional books

Cited By (128)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9292111B2 (en) 1998-01-26 2016-03-22 Apple Inc. Gesturing with a multipoint sensing device
US9239673B2 (en) 1998-01-26 2016-01-19 Apple Inc. Gesturing with a multipoint sensing device
US7366987B2 (en) * 2001-06-01 2008-04-29 Seiko Epson Corporation Interrupt processing in display control
US20040051702A1 (en) * 2001-06-01 2004-03-18 Seiko Epson Corporation Display control system, display service providing system ,display control program, and display control method
US9606668B2 (en) 2002-02-07 2017-03-28 Apple Inc. Mode-based graphical user interfaces for touch sensitive input devices
US20060050059A1 (en) * 2002-12-12 2006-03-09 Kimiyasu Satoh Input device, portable electronic apparatus, remote control device, and piezoelectric actuator driving controlling method in input device
US7800590B2 (en) * 2002-12-12 2010-09-21 Sony Corporation Input device, portable electronic apparatus, remote control device, and piezoelectric actuator driving/controlling method in input device
US7542026B2 (en) * 2003-11-03 2009-06-02 International Business Machines Corporation Apparatus method and system for improved feedback of pointing device event processing
US20050093817A1 (en) * 2003-11-03 2005-05-05 Pagan William G. Apparatus method and system for improved feedback of pointing device event processing
US9239677B2 (en) 2004-05-06 2016-01-19 Apple Inc. Operation of a computer with touch screen interface
US10042418B2 (en) 2004-07-30 2018-08-07 Apple Inc. Proximity detector in handheld device
US11036282B2 (en) 2004-07-30 2021-06-15 Apple Inc. Proximity detector in handheld device
US8612856B2 (en) 2004-07-30 2013-12-17 Apple Inc. Proximity detector in handheld device
US8479122B2 (en) 2004-07-30 2013-07-02 Apple Inc. Gestures for touch sensitive input devices
US9348458B2 (en) 2004-07-30 2016-05-24 Apple Inc. Gestures for touch sensitive input devices
US8381135B2 (en) 2004-07-30 2013-02-19 Apple Inc. Proximity detector in handheld device
US8239784B2 (en) 2004-07-30 2012-08-07 Apple Inc. Mode-based graphical user interfaces for touch sensitive input devices
US20070263514A1 (en) * 2004-08-30 2007-11-15 Yoshiaki Iwata Recorder
US9141254B2 (en) * 2005-11-12 2015-09-22 Orthosensor Inc Navigation system and user interface for directing a control action
US20110029913A1 (en) * 2005-11-12 2011-02-03 Marc Boillot Navigation System and User Interface For Directing a Control Action
US8762857B2 (en) * 2006-01-30 2014-06-24 Fasttac, Inc. Portable dataport device and method for retrieving, inter-relating, annotating and managing electronic documents at a point of need
US20100241988A1 (en) * 2006-01-30 2010-09-23 Steeb Iii Raymond H Portable dataport device and method for retrieving, inter-relating, annotating and managing electronic documents at a point of need
US11023122B2 (en) 2006-09-06 2021-06-01 Apple Inc. Video manager for portable multifunction device
US11592952B2 (en) 2006-09-06 2023-02-28 Apple Inc. Portable electronic device, method, and graphical user interface for displaying structured electronic documents
US10656778B2 (en) 2006-09-06 2020-05-19 Apple Inc. Portable electronic device, method, and graphical user interface for displaying structured electronic documents
US11106326B2 (en) 2006-09-06 2021-08-31 Apple Inc. Portable electronic device, method, and graphical user interface for displaying structured electronic documents
US9690446B2 (en) 2006-09-06 2017-06-27 Apple Inc. Portable electronic device, method, and graphical user interface for displaying structured electronic documents
US9927970B2 (en) 2006-09-06 2018-03-27 Apple Inc. Portable electronic device performing similar operations for different gestures
US11481112B2 (en) 2006-09-06 2022-10-25 Apple Inc. Portable electronic device performing similar operations for different gestures
US10228815B2 (en) 2006-09-06 2019-03-12 Apple Inc. Portable electronic device, method, and graphical user interface for displaying structured electronic documents
US10222977B2 (en) 2006-09-06 2019-03-05 Apple Inc. Portable electronic device performing similar operations for different gestures
US11481106B2 (en) 2006-09-06 2022-10-25 Apple Inc. Video manager for portable multifunction device
CN102681776A (en) * 2006-09-06 2012-09-19 苹果公司 Portable electonic device performing similar oprations for different gestures
US11921969B2 (en) 2006-09-06 2024-03-05 Apple Inc. Portable electronic device, method, and graphical user interface for displaying structured electronic documents
US10838617B2 (en) 2006-09-06 2020-11-17 Apple Inc. Portable electronic device performing similar operations for different gestures
US8453072B2 (en) 2007-03-16 2013-05-28 Apple Inc. Parameter setting superimposed upon an image
WO2008115638A1 (en) * 2007-03-16 2008-09-25 Apple Inc. Parameter setting superimposed upon an image
US20110219329A1 (en) * 2007-03-16 2011-09-08 Apple Inc. Parameter setting superimposed upon an image
US20080226199A1 (en) * 2007-03-16 2008-09-18 Apple Inc. Parameter setting superimposed upon an image
US7954067B2 (en) 2007-03-16 2011-05-31 Apple Inc. Parameter setting superimposed upon an image
US20080229232A1 (en) * 2007-03-16 2008-09-18 Apple Inc. Full screen editing of visual media
US20090083070A1 (en) * 2007-09-24 2009-03-26 Medtronic, Inc. Therapy adjustment based on patient event indication
EP2043341A1 (en) * 2007-09-28 2009-04-01 Lg Electronics Inc. Mobile terminal and method of controlling the mobile terminal
US20090089717A1 (en) * 2007-09-28 2009-04-02 Lg Electronics Inc. Mobile terminal and method of controlling the mobile terminal
US8365099B2 (en) 2007-09-28 2013-01-29 Lg Electronics Inc. Mobile terminal and method of controlling the mobile terminal
US8593408B2 (en) * 2008-03-20 2013-11-26 Lg Electronics Inc. Electronic document reproduction apparatus and reproducing method thereof
US20090237367A1 (en) * 2008-03-20 2009-09-24 Lg Electronics Inc. Electronic document reproduction apparatus and reproducing method thereof
US8531420B2 (en) * 2008-03-20 2013-09-10 Lg Electronics Inc. Electronic document reproduction apparatus and reproducing method thereof
US20110210932A1 (en) * 2008-03-20 2011-09-01 Seung-Kyoon Ryu Electronic document reproduction apparatus and reproducing method thereof
US9230074B2 (en) * 2008-04-15 2016-01-05 Htc Corporation Method for switching wallpaper in screen lock state, mobile electronic device thereof, and storage medium thereof
US20090259968A1 (en) * 2008-04-15 2009-10-15 Htc Corporation Method for switching wallpaper in screen lock state, mobile electronic device thereof, and storage medium thereof
US20110126097A1 (en) * 2008-07-17 2011-05-26 Nec Corporation Information processing apparatus, storage medium having program recorded thereon, and object movement method
US9933932B2 (en) 2008-07-17 2018-04-03 Nec Corporation Information processing apparatus having a contact detection unit capable of detecting a plurality of contact points, storage medium having program recorded thereon, and object movement method
US10656824B2 (en) 2008-07-17 2020-05-19 Nec Corporation Information processing apparatus having a contact detection unit capable of detecting a plurality of contact points, storage medium having program recorded thereon, and object movement method
US20100020371A1 (en) * 2008-07-24 2010-01-28 Flexmedia Electronics Corp. Digital photo album, display method thereof and controller using the display method
US8345012B2 (en) * 2008-10-02 2013-01-01 Utc Fire & Security Americas Corporation, Inc. Method and interface device for operating a security system
US20100085310A1 (en) * 2008-10-02 2010-04-08 Donald Edward Becker Method and interface device for operating a security system
US8654087B2 (en) 2008-12-08 2014-02-18 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Flexible display device and data displaying method thereof
US9013433B2 (en) 2008-12-08 2015-04-21 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Flexible display device and data displaying method thereof
US9671870B2 (en) 2008-12-08 2017-06-06 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Flexible display device and data displaying method thereof
US9013432B2 (en) 2008-12-08 2015-04-21 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Flexible display device and data displaying method thereof
US20100141605A1 (en) * 2008-12-08 2010-06-10 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Flexible display device and data displaying method thereof
US8638311B2 (en) * 2008-12-08 2014-01-28 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Display device and data displaying method thereof
US9268368B2 (en) 2008-12-08 2016-02-23 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Flexible display device and data displaying method thereof
US9946358B2 (en) 2008-12-08 2018-04-17 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Flexible display device and data displaying method thereof
US8786640B2 (en) * 2009-02-02 2014-07-22 Nec Corporation Information display device, moving distance display method and moving distance display program
US20120038680A1 (en) * 2009-02-02 2012-02-16 Nec Corporation Information display device, moving distance display method and moving distance display program
US8549431B2 (en) * 2009-05-19 2013-10-01 Panasonic Corporation Content display device and content display method
US20110167384A1 (en) * 2009-05-19 2011-07-07 Hiroshi Yabu Content display device and content display method
US10235713B2 (en) 2010-07-02 2019-03-19 Ebay Inc. User-widget-based transaction system
US11074645B2 (en) 2010-07-02 2021-07-27 Ebay Inc. User-widget-based transaction system
US20120005585A1 (en) * 2010-07-02 2012-01-05 Yum Kyungchun User-widget-based transaction system
US9223476B2 (en) * 2010-07-02 2015-12-29 Ebay Inc. User-widget-based transaction system
US9678572B2 (en) 2010-10-01 2017-06-13 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for turning e-book pages in portable terminal
CN102446068A (en) * 2010-10-01 2012-05-09 三星电子株式会社 Apparatus and method for turning e-book pages in portable terminal
US9557910B2 (en) 2010-10-01 2017-01-31 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for turning E-book pages in portable terminal
US10073595B2 (en) 2010-10-01 2018-09-11 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for turning E-book pages in portable terminal
US20120089938A1 (en) * 2010-10-08 2012-04-12 Fuminori Homma Information Processing Apparatus, Information Processing Method, and Program
US9372600B2 (en) 2010-10-20 2016-06-21 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Screen display method and apparatus of a mobile terminal
US11747963B2 (en) 2010-10-20 2023-09-05 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Screen display method and apparatus of a mobile terminal
US10275124B2 (en) 2010-10-20 2019-04-30 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Screen display method and apparatus of a mobile terminal
US11360646B2 (en) 2010-10-20 2022-06-14 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Screen display method and apparatus of a mobile terminal
US10788956B2 (en) 2010-10-20 2020-09-29 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Screen display method and apparatus of a mobile terminal
US9442516B2 (en) 2011-01-24 2016-09-13 Apple Inc. Device, method, and graphical user interface for navigating through an electronic document
US9671825B2 (en) 2011-01-24 2017-06-06 Apple Inc. Device, method, and graphical user interface for navigating through an electronic document
US9552015B2 (en) 2011-01-24 2017-01-24 Apple Inc. Device, method, and graphical user interface for navigating through an electronic document
US8782513B2 (en) 2011-01-24 2014-07-15 Apple Inc. Device, method, and graphical user interface for navigating through an electronic document
US20120192118A1 (en) * 2011-01-24 2012-07-26 Migos Charles J Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Navigating through an Electronic Document
US20210374327A1 (en) * 2011-05-17 2021-12-02 Apple Inc. Content rendition generation and control
CN102279706A (en) * 2011-08-03 2011-12-14 惠州Tcl移动通信有限公司 Electronic equipment and method for turning pages in display interface of electronic equipment
US20130067366A1 (en) * 2011-09-14 2013-03-14 Microsoft Corporation Establishing content navigation direction based on directional user gestures
CN103197871A (en) * 2012-01-09 2013-07-10 联想(北京)有限公司 Page jump method and equipment
WO2013129858A1 (en) * 2012-03-02 2013-09-06 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method for displaying pages of e-book and mobile device adapted thereto
US9046957B2 (en) 2012-03-02 2015-06-02 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method for displaying pages of E-book and mobile device adapted thereto
US10261630B2 (en) 2012-04-27 2019-04-16 Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America Input device, input support method, and program
US20150169100A1 (en) * 2012-08-30 2015-06-18 Fujitsu Limited Display device and computer readable recording medium stored a program
US9594447B2 (en) * 2012-08-30 2017-03-14 Fujitsu Limited Display device and computer readable recording medium stored a program
US9016964B2 (en) 2012-09-13 2015-04-28 Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha Printer with touch panel for receiving contact trajectory pattern for producing a print
WO2014185586A1 (en) 2013-05-16 2014-11-20 Lg Electronics Inc. Portable device and control method thereof
EP2997443A4 (en) * 2013-05-16 2017-03-01 LG Electronics Inc. Portable device and control method thereof
US10921976B2 (en) 2013-09-03 2021-02-16 Apple Inc. User interface for manipulating user interface objects
US20150068819A1 (en) * 2013-09-11 2015-03-12 Debra L. Dyer Food product scale
US9377346B2 (en) 2013-09-11 2016-06-28 Illinois Tool Works Inc. Food product scale
US9377345B2 (en) 2013-09-11 2016-06-28 Illinois Tool Works Inc. Food product scale
US11041751B2 (en) 2013-09-11 2021-06-22 Illinois Tool Works Inc. Food product scale
US9810572B2 (en) 2013-09-11 2017-11-07 Illinois Tool Works Inc. Food product scale
US9494460B2 (en) 2013-09-11 2016-11-15 Illinois Tool Works Inc. Food product scale
US9562806B2 (en) * 2013-09-11 2017-02-07 Illinois Tool Works Inc. Food product scale
US20150296034A1 (en) * 2014-04-09 2015-10-15 Fujitsu Limited Read determination device, read determination method, and read determination program
US11907013B2 (en) 2014-05-30 2024-02-20 Apple Inc. Continuity of applications across devices
US20160026694A1 (en) * 2014-07-28 2016-01-28 Baidu Online Network Technology (Beijing) Co., Ltd Method and apparatus for providing search result
KR102391638B1 (en) * 2014-07-28 2022-04-28 바이두 온라인 네트웍 테크놀러지 (베이징) 캄파니 리미티드 Method and apparatus for providing search result
KR20160013787A (en) * 2014-07-28 2016-02-05 바이두 온라인 네트웍 테크놀러지 (베이징) 캄파니 리미티드 Method and apparatus for providing search result
US11747956B2 (en) 2014-09-02 2023-09-05 Apple Inc. Multi-dimensional object rearrangement
US11157135B2 (en) 2014-09-02 2021-10-26 Apple Inc. Multi-dimensional object rearrangement
US11402968B2 (en) 2014-09-02 2022-08-02 Apple Inc. Reduced size user in interface
US10637986B2 (en) 2016-06-10 2020-04-28 Apple Inc. Displaying and updating a set of application views
US11323559B2 (en) 2016-06-10 2022-05-03 Apple Inc. Displaying and updating a set of application views
US11073799B2 (en) 2016-06-11 2021-07-27 Apple Inc. Configuring context-specific user interfaces
US10739974B2 (en) 2016-06-11 2020-08-11 Apple Inc. Configuring context-specific user interfaces
US11733656B2 (en) 2016-06-11 2023-08-22 Apple Inc. Configuring context-specific user interfaces
CN108520440A (en) * 2018-03-30 2018-09-11 掌阅科技股份有限公司 Determination method, electronic equipment and the computer storage media of e-book consumption demand
CN110673902A (en) * 2018-07-02 2020-01-10 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 Page display method and device and storage medium
US11449188B1 (en) 2021-05-15 2022-09-20 Apple Inc. Shared-content session user interfaces
US11360634B1 (en) 2021-05-15 2022-06-14 Apple Inc. Shared-content session user interfaces
US11822761B2 (en) 2021-05-15 2023-11-21 Apple Inc. Shared-content session user interfaces
US11907605B2 (en) 2021-05-15 2024-02-20 Apple Inc. Shared-content session user interfaces
US11928303B2 (en) 2021-05-15 2024-03-12 Apple Inc. Shared-content session user interfaces

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2001265481A (en) 2001-09-28
US6765559B2 (en) 2004-07-20
US20010024195A1 (en) 2001-09-27

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US6765559B2 (en) Page information display method and device and storage medium storing program for displaying page information
US6741268B1 (en) Page information display method and apparatus, and storage medium for storing program or data for display page
JP4063246B2 (en) Page information display device
US6891551B2 (en) Selection handles in editing electronic documents
US7735007B2 (en) Adding and removing white space from a document
EP1363231B1 (en) Overlaying electronic ink
CN1848081B (en) User interface systems and methods for viewing and manipulating digital documents
JP4637455B2 (en) User interface utilization method and product including computer usable media
EP0635780B1 (en) User interface having clickthrough tools that can be composed with other tools
US7810042B2 (en) Page bar control
US9170731B2 (en) Insertion point bungee space tool
US5798752A (en) User interface having simultaneously movable tools and cursor
EP0635779B1 (en) User interface having movable sheet with click-through tools
JP3478725B2 (en) Document information management system
US20040085358A1 (en) Glow highlighting as an ink attribute
WO2011041547A1 (en) Systems and methods to facilitate active reading
JP2004355106A (en) Touch interface of computer
WO1994010678A1 (en) Data input system for pen-based computers
JPH06505102A (en) Display system and method for performing contextual scrolling
JP5066877B2 (en) Image display device, image display method, and program
EP0636974A2 (en) System and method for control of a computer
PARTNER User interface having movable sheet with click-through tools

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION